Palm Treo 700P Alltel User Guide Your Palm® Treo™ Smartphone
Palm-Treo-700P-Bell-User-Guide-777835 palm-treo-700p-bell-user-guide-777835
Palm-Treo-700P-Cellular-South-User-Guide-777837 palm-treo-700p-cellular-south-user-guide-777837
Palm-Treo-700P-Telus-User-Guide-777841 palm-treo-700p-telus-user-guide-777841
User Guide palm-treo-700p-user-guide Palm Smartphone User Guides
Treo 700p (Cellular South) - User Guide treo700pcdma_cellular_south_UG Free User Guide for Palm TREO Series Mobile Phone, Manual - page2
2015-07-27
: Palm Palm-Treo-700P-Alltel-User-Guide-777833 palm-treo-700p-alltel-user-guide-777833 palm pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 286
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
®
™
Your Palm Treo 700P
Smartphone
User Guide
Intellectual property notices
6,490,155; 6,480,146; 6,457,134; 6,456,247; 6,442,637; 6,441,824;
© 2006 Palm, Inc. All rights reserved. Blazer, HotSync, Palm, Palm
OS, Treo, VersaMail, and the Palm and Treo logos are among the
trademarks or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to Palm,
Inc. This product contains ACCESS Co., Ltd.’s NetFront 3.0 Internet
browser software. © 1996-2005 ACCESS Co., Ltd. and ACCESS
Systems America, Inc. NetFront is the trademark or registered
trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other countries except
the United States of America. NetFront is a registered trademark of
NetFront Communications, Inc. in the United States of America and
is used under a license. Documents To Go is a trademark or
registered trademark of DataViz, Inc. A portion of the enclosed
product is © copyrighted by Fraunhofer IIS (2005). All rights reserved.
All other brand and product names are or may be trademarks of, and
are used to identify products or services of, their respective owners.
6,437,543; 6,429,625; 6,425,087; 6,389,572; 6,388,877; 6,381,650;
This product is protected by one or more of the following United
States patents:
6,976,226; 6,975,304; 6,965,375; 6,961,567; 6,961,029; 6,957,397;
6,952,571; 6,950,988; 6,947,975; 6,947,017; 6,943,667; 6,940,490;
6,924,752; 6,907,233; 6,906,701; 6,906,741; 6,901,276; 6,850,780;
6,845,408; 6,842,628; 6,842,335; 6,831,662; 6,819,552; 6,804,699;
6,795,710; 6,788,285; 6,781,824; 6,781,575; 6,766,490; 6,745,047;
6,363,082; 6,344,848; 6,317,085; 6,241,537; 6,222,857; 6,185,423;
6,147,314; 6,115,248; 6,064,342; D421,251; D429,252; D466,128;
D478,091. Patent pending.
This product also is licensed under United States patent 6,058,304.
A portion of this software includes software modules developed by
the Independent JPEG group. MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding
technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. This
product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of
Microsoft Corporation. Use or distribution of such technology outside
of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an
authorized Microsoft subsidiary.
Disclaimer and limitation of liability
Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage
or loss resulting from the use of this guide. Palm, Inc. and its
suppliers assume no responsibility for any loss or claims by third
parties that may arise through the use of this software. Palm, Inc. and
its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss caused
by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs.
Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media
to protect against data loss.
6,744,451; 6,738,852; 6,732,105; 6,724,720; 6,721,892; 6,712,638;
6,708,280; 6,697,639; 6,687,839; 6,685,328; 6,665,803; 6,618,044
;6,590,588; 6,539,476; 6,532,148; 6,523,124; 6,519,141; 6,516,202;
PN: 406-10803-00
v. 1.0
Contents
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What’s in the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Chapter 1: Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Treo 700P smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting up your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Chapter 2: Moving around on your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Chapter 3: Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Turning your smartphone on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Managing active calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Using a phone headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Customizing phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
iii
Chapter 4: Your email and other messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Which application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
The VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Chapter 5: Your connections to the web and wireless devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Connections with Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Chapter 6: Your photos, videos, and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Camera and Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Pics & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Pocket Tunes™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Chapter 7: Your personal information organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Chapter 8: Your memos and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Documents To Go® Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Chapter 9: Your application and info management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
iv
Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Sending information with Bluetooth® wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Chapter 10: Your personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
System sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Chapter 11: Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Desktop software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Making room on your Treo smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
v
Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Important safety and legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
vi
Welcome
Congratulations on the purchase of your
Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone! In one
compact and indispensable device, you
now have all of the following:
•
An advanced mobile smartphone
•
Mobile email (corporate and personal)
•
High-speed Internet connection and
data transfer with 1XRTT and EVDO
support
•
A Palm OS organizer with portable
expansion capability (MultiMediaCard/
SD/SDIO)
•
•
®
A 1.3-megapixel digital camera
Text messaging
•
A media player
•
Productivity software
This guide helps you set up your Treo
smartphone and quickly learn to use it.
NOTE Phone and text messaging services
require a service contract with your
wireless service provider. Web and email
services require a service contract and
high-speed data service from your wireless
service provider. Data speeds vary based
on network availability and capacity.
What’s in the box?
You should have received all the following
items in the Treo smartphone box:
Hardware
•
Treo smartphone
•
Rechargeable battery
•
AC charger with international adapter(s)
(if required in your region)
•
USB sync cable
•
Stereo headset
WELCOME
1
Documentation and software
•
Read This First booklet
•
Quick Reference
•
Palm Software Installation CD, which
includes:
•
2
•
Palm® Desktop software
•
Bonus software for your smartphone
•
User Guide (this guide)
•
User Guide for the VersaMail
Application
Palm warranty
WELCOME
What do I need to
get started?
As you work through the instructions in this
guide, you’ll need all the items that came in
the Treo 700P smartphone box (see What’s
in the box? ), as well as the following:
•
An activated account with your wireless
service provider
•
A location with wireless coverage for
your smartphone
•
An electrical outlet
•
The computer with which you want to
synchronize your personal information
•
The Palm Software Installation CD
included in the box
CHAPT ER
1
Setting up
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Palm® Treo™ 700P
smartphone. You’re about to discover the many things about
your smartphone that will help you better manage your life and
have fun, too.
As you become more familiar with your smartphone, you’ll
want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it
uniquely yours. But first, take these few easy steps to set up.
Benefits
•
Know where your smartphone
controls are located
•
Start using your smartphone right
away
•
Establish a link between your
smartphone and your computer
In this chapter
Treo 700P smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting up your computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
Treo 700P smartphone overview
Front view
Indicator light (phone
and charge indicator)
Earpiece
5-way navigator and
Center button
Power/End
Applications
Volume
Menu
Side button
Send
Messaging
Phone
Protect your screen. Be careful to store
your smartphone away from items that might
scratch or crush the screen. Visit
www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo to find
carrying cases and other useful accessories.
TIP
Calendar
When your smartphone
screen is on, you can press and hold the Side
button to open an application of your choice;
see Reassigning buttons for details.
DID YOU KNOW?
5
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
Back view
Self-portrait mirror
Battery door release
Camera lens
Speaker
Headset jack
Multi-connector
Microphone
IMPORTANT The Treo smartphone
speaker includes a large magnet, so be
sure to keep your smartphone away from
credit cards or other items that could be
demagnetized.
6
Top view
Antenna
Expansion
card slot
Infrared
(IR) port
Battery door
release
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
Stylus
Ringer
switch
DID YOU KNOW? The Ringer switch silences all
sounds. When you need quiet, there’s no
need to navigate menus.
2 Align the metal contacts on the battery
with the contacts inside the battery
compartment.
3 Insert the battery into the compartment
at a 45-degree angle, and then press
it into place.
Battery
contacts
Installing the battery
Smartphone
contacts
1 Press the battery door release, and
slide the battery door downward
to remove it from your smartphone.
Notch
4 Slide the battery door onto the back of
the smartphone until it clicks into place.
7
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
5 When the language selection screen
appears, select the language you want
to use.
IMPORTANT You must select the same
language on your smartphone and desktop
software.
6 Follow the onscreen instructions to set
up your smartphone.
If your smartphone does not turn on, you
need to connect it to the AC charger. If it still
does not turn on after you connect the AC
charger, then do a soft reset. See Performing
a soft reset.
TIP
Charging the battery
The battery comes with a sufficient charge
to complete the setup process and activate
your phone. After activation, we
recommend charging your smartphone for
3.5 hours (or until the indicator light is solid
green) to give it a full charge. See
Maximizing battery life for tips on
maximizing the life of your smartphone’s
battery.
8
To avoid draining the battery, charge your
smartphone every day, especially if you use
your phone often.
TIP
If your battery ever becomes
fully drained, your info is still stored safely on
your smartphone until you recharge the
battery or connect your smartphone to a
power source.
DID YOU KNOW?
1 If necessary, connect the international
adapter to the AC charger plug.
2 Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
3 Connect the charger cable to the
bottom of the smartphone. Make sure
the arrow on the connector is facing up,
toward the screen.
DID YOU KNOW? You can also charge your
smartphone by connecting it to your computer
with the sync cable. You can do this with or
without using the charger cable (see
Connecting your Treo smartphone to your
computer).
Keep in mind that it takes longer to charge
the battery using the sync cable, and if your
laptop isn’t plugged into a power source, it can
drain the laptop’s battery.
TIP
4 To confirm that your smartphone is
charging, check the indicator light on
your smartphone.
•
Solid red indicates that your
smartphone is charging.
•
Solid green indicates that your
smartphone is fully charged.
Indicator light
If the battery is fully drained, it may take a
few moments for the indicator light to turn on
when you begin charging.
TIP
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
If the indicator light doesn’t turn on when
you connect your smartphone to the AC
charger, double-check the cable connection
and the electrical outlet to which it is
connected.
TIP
When your smartphone is on (see Turning
your smartphone on and off), the onscreen
battery icon displays the charging status:
A red lightning bolt indicates that
the battery is connected to a wall
outlet and is charging.
A green lightning bolt indicates
that the battery is connected to a
wall outlet and is fully charged.
A partial battery without a
lightning bolt indicates that the
battery is not connected to a wall
outlet and it has some power.
An almost empty battery that is
red at the bottom indicates that
you need to charge the battery
immediately.
9
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
•
Charge your smartphone whenever
you’re at your desk, or charge it
overnight. The Li-Ion battery has a much
longer useful life when it is topped off
frequently, versus charging it after it is
fully drained.
•
Your smartphone’s wireless features
(phone, email, messaging, and web)
and media features (camera, media
players, eBooks, and games) consume
more power than its organizer features.
If you spend a lot of time using the
wireless and media features, keep an
eye on the battery icon and charge
when necessary.
•
If you don’t plan to use the wireless
features on your smartphone for a
while, turn off your phone (see Turning
your phone on and off) and let all calls
be picked up by voicemail.
•
As with any mobile phone, if you are in
an area with no wireless coverage, your
smartphone searches for a signal, which
consumes power. If you cannot move to
an area of better coverage, temporarily
turn off your phone. While your phone is
off, you can continue to use your
smartphone’s nonwireless features.
To see exactly how much power is left in
your battery, tap the onscreen battery icon.
TIP
Battery icon
Maximizing battery
life
Battery life depends on how you use your
smartphone. You can maximize the life of
your battery by following a few easy
guidelines:
You can buy an extra battery as a spare for
long airplane trips or periods of heavy use. To
purchase batteries that are compatible with
your smartphone, go to www.palm.com/
treo700pcdma-mytreo.
TIP
10
•
Turn down the screen brightness (see
Adjusting the brightness).
•
Decrease the settings in Power
Preferences and turn off Beam Receive
(see Optimizing power settings).
•
Turn off the Bluetooth feature if you’re
not using it. See Connecting to a
Bluetooth hands-free device.
®
3 If you haven’t already activated your
phone, follow your wireless service
provider’s activation steps before
continuing.
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
4 Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the
number you want to call.
Making your first call
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If Phone Off
appears in the title bar, you need to turn on
your phone (see Turning your phone on and
off). If No Service appears in the title bar,
you are outside a wireless coverage area. If
you believe you are in a wireless coverage
area and this problem persists, contact
your wireless service provider for
assistance.
1 Press Phone
5 Press Send
to dial.
6 After you finish the call, press Power/
End
to end the call.
You can also dial phone
numbers with the number pad on the
keyboard. See Dialing using the keyboard for
details
DID YOU KNOW?
.
2 If prompted, press Center
to turn
off Keyguard (see Locking your keyboard
(Keyguard) for more info).
Adjusting call volume
While a call is in progress, press the
Volume button on the side of your
smartphone to adjust the call volume.
11
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
•
To increase the volume, press the upper
half of the Volume button.
•
To decrease the volume, press the
lower half of the Volume button.
Look here for
your phone
number
Volume button
If your phone number doesn’t appear in
Phone Info, turn your phone off and on again
before you recheck Phone Info. If your phone
number still doesn’t appear, contact your
wireless service provider to confirm that your
phone has been activated.
TIP
What’s my phone number?
1 Make sure your phone is on (see
Turning your phone on and off).
2 Press Phone
.
3 Press Menu
.
4 Select Options, and then select Phone
Info.
Setting up your
computer
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To set up your
computer, you also need the sync cable
that came with your smartphone.
You can enter or change info on your
smartphone or on your computer (using
Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft
12
Outlook for Windows), and then sync to
automatically update the info in both
places, so there’s no need to enter the info
twice. We strongly recommend that you
sync your smartphone with your computer
frequently to keep your info up-to-date (and
backed up) in both locations.
Before you can sync, you need to install
the desktop synchronization software and
connect the sync cable to your computer.
System requirements
Your computer should meet the following
minimum system profiles:
•
•
Windows 2000 or XP (or later)
•
32MB of available memory (RAM)
•
170MB of free hard disk space
•
CD drive
•
Available USB port
Mac OS X version 10.2 or later
•
128MB of total memory (RAM)
•
190MB of free hard disk space
•
CD drive
•
Available USB port
®
Upgrading from another Palm OS device
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
NOTE If you are setting up your first Palm
OS device, skip ahead to Connecting your
Treo smartphone to your computer.
You can transfer all compatible applications
and information from your previous Palm
OS® device to your new Treo 700P
smartphone. This includes your calendar
events, contacts, memos, and tasks, as
well as your application settings and any
compatible third-party applications
and files.
When you install the desktop software
from the Palm Software Installation CD,
some third-party applications may be
quarantined because they are not
compatible with the Palm OS software
version 5.4.9 on your new Treo
smartphone. Quarantined files are not
installed on your smartphone, nor are they
deleted; these files are placed in a new
folder on your computer: C:\Program
Files\Palm\device name\PalmOS5
Incompatible Apps. (On some systems
Palm may be replaced with palmOne or
Handspring.)
13
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
Some third-party utilities allow you to back
up your old device’s information onto an
expansion card and then transfer the info to
your Treo 700P smartphone. We do not
recommend this method because any
incompatible applications are also transferred
to your smartphone.
TIP
1 Calculate how much space your apps
and info occupy on your previous Palm
OS device:
14
2 If the space occupied on your previous
device is 60MB or less, then go to step
3. If the space occupied is greater than
60MB, then do any of the following to
reduce the storage space you’re using
before you go to the next step:
•
From Applications View, open the
menus.
•
Select Info on the App menu.
•
At the bottom of the screen, select
Size.
•
Delete any third-party applications
that you no longer use.
•
Look at the numbers on the Free
Space line and subtract the number
on the left from the number on the
right to calculate the space used. For
example, on the device shown here,
22.4 – 17.5 = 4.9. This means that
4.9MB of space is occupied on this
device.
•
Move large files, such as eBooks and
images, to an expansion card.
•
Move third-party applications to an
expansion card.
•
Purge old info in applications such as
Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do),
and email. Refer to the
documentation that came with your
previous device for instructions on
these items.
in the User list in Palm Desktop
software.)
3 Synchronize your previous device with
your previous desktop software to back
up your information one last time.
MAC ONLY If you have pictures on your
4 Install the desktop synchronization
software from your new Palm Software
Installation CD (see Installing the
desktop synchronization software).
previous device, copy them from your
previous device to an expansion card or
beam them to your new Treo 700P
smartphone.
IMPORTANT Do not synchronize your new
Treo 700P smartphone with any previous
versions of Palm Desktop software.
6 If you plan to continue using your
previous device, perform a hard reset to
remove its associated device name.
(See the documentation that came with
your previous device for instructions on
performing a hard reset.) Each device
you synchronize with your computer
must have a unique name. The next
time you synchronize your previous
device with your computer, be sure to
assign it a new name.
5 During the installation process, sync
your new Treo smartphone with your
new desktop software as instructed.
When prompted, do the following:
•
Connect your new smartphone to
your computer (see Connecting your
Treo smartphone to your computer).
•
Indicate whether you want to sync
only the info in your PIM apps
(Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and
Tasks) or all info and apps (excluding
apps known to be incompatible).
•
Select a device name for your new
smartphone; be sure to select the
same name that you used for your old
device. (This is the name that appears
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
If any third-party applications are
quarantined during the installation, do not
manually install them. Contact the
third-party developer for software updates
and info about compatibility with your Treo
700P smartphone.
15
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
If you have trouble upgrading, including
finding the location of quarantined files, see
Upgrading.
TIP
minimized. Your computer needs all its
resources to install the software.
2 Insert the Palm Software Installation CD
into the CD drive on your computer.
Installing the desktop synchronization
software
IMPORTANT Even if you already own a
Palm OS device and have installed a
previous version of the desktop software,
you must install the software from the
Palm Software Installation CD that came
with your Treo 700P smartphone.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing
on a computer at work, make sure your
computer is configured to let you install
new software. Contact your company’s
IT department for help.
If you want to sync info with applications
other than Palm Desktop or Microsoft
Outlook, you need to purchase additional
third-party sync software. This sync software
is sometimes called a conduit.
TIP
1 Close any apps that are running on your
computer, including those that are
16
3 If you are installing on a Mac,
double-click the CD icon on the desktop,
and then double-click the
PalmSoftware.pkg icon.
4 When the installation wizard opens,
follow the onscreen instructions. Please
note these important points about the
installation process:
•
When the language selection screen
appears, click the same language you
selected on your smartphone.
•
You can choose which desktop
software you want to use for
synchronization: Palm Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook
(Windows only).
NOTE If you use Microsoft Outlook as your
desktop email application, select Microsoft
Outlook as your desktop synchronization
software. If you select Microsoft Outlook,
Palm Desktop software still installs on your
computer. When you enter information on
your computer, be sure to enter your
information in Microsoft Outlook not in
Palm Desktop software.
•
When the install process prompts you
to connect your smartphone to your
computer, go to Connecting your Treo
smartphone to your computer.
Connecting your Treo smartphone to your
computer
1 If necessary, connect the international
adapter to the AC charger plug.
For best performance, plug your sync
cable directly into a USB port on your
computer. If your computer has USB ports on
both the front and back, we suggest using the
back port; the front port is often a low-power
port. If you use a USB hub, make sure the
hub has its own power supply.
TIP
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
4 With the sync button facing up, connect
the sync cable to the bottom of your
smartphone. Do not press the sync
button until you are instructed to do so.
5 Connect the charger cable to the
connector on the sync cable.
Sync
cable
Sync
button
2 Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
3 Plug the USB sync cable into an
available USB port or a powered USB
hub on your computer.
You are now ready to synchronize; go to
Synchronizing information—the basics.
17
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
Synchronizing
information—the
basics
info up-to-date (and backed up) in
both locations.
The info from all the following applications
is updated by default each time you sync
your smartphone with your desktop
software:
Synchronizing means that info that is
entered or updated in one place
(your smartphone or your computer) is
automatically updated in the other, so
there’s no need to enter the info twice. We
strongly recommend that you sync your
smartphone with your computer or
corporate server frequently to keep your
18
How each application syncs depends on
your computer type and the desktop
software you are using, as follows:
Computer type
Desktop type
What syncs and where
Windows
Microsoft
Outlook
•
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and Tasks
sync with Outlook
•
Pics&Videos syncs with Palm Desktop
Windows
Palm Desktop
All apps sync with Palm Desktop
Mac
Palm Desktop
All apps sync with Palm Desktop
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To sync your info,
you must install Palm Desktop software
from the Palm Software Installation CD
that came with your Treo 700P
smartphone—even if you sync with
Outlook or another third-party application.
See Installing the desktop synchronization
software for instructions.
3 A message indicates that
synchronization is in progress.
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
4 Wait for a message that indicates that
the process is complete before you
disconnect the sync cable.
If you have problems synchronizing, see
Synchronization for suggestions.
TIP
For more sync options, including which
apps sync, see Synchronizing information—
advanced.
TIP
1 Connect your Treo 700P smartphone to
your computer (see Connecting your
Treo smartphone to your computer).
NOTE If you’re performing initial setup,
your smartphone should already be
connected to your computer.
2 Press the sync button on the sync
cable.
Sync button
If you’re finishing your initial setup, you
now have the option to install bonus
software from the Palm Software
Installation CD. If you choose to install
some of the bonus software, you need to
sync again to install the software on your
smartphone. You can also install bonus
software later, see Installing bonus
software from the CD.
For info on locating your pictures and
videos on your computer, see Viewing
pictures and videos on your computer.
TIP
19
CHAPTER
1
20
SETTING UP
CHAPT ER
2
Moving around on your
smartphone
Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you
figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the
avenues run east/west? Learning to move around on your
smartphone is similar. Most Palm OS® applications use the
same set of controls. So once you learn how to use these
controls on your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone, you’ll be
driving all over town and you won’t even need a map.
Benefits
•
Find and open applications quickly
•
Access extra features with menus
•
Move around in applications with
one hand, using the 5-way
navigator
•
Access many more characters and
symbols than are displayed on the
keyboard
In this chapter
Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Moving around the
screen
Some third-party applications may not
work with the 5-way navigator, and you must
use the stylus instead.
TIP
2
CHAPTER
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
In this guide, we use arrow
icons to indicate directions on the 5-way.
These are different from any onscreen arrows
that you tap with your stylus or select with
the 5-way to display pick lists.
DID YOU KNOW?
To move around the Treo 700P smartphone
screen, you can use the 5-way navigator for
one-handed navigation, or you can tap
items on the screen with the stylus. With
use, you will find your own favorite way to
scroll, highlight, and select menu items.
The 5-way includes the following buttons:
Center
Up
Left
Right
Down
23
CHAPTER
2
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
Up
or Down
at a time.
Scrolling through screens
As on a computer, you scroll on the Treo
smartphone to move from field to field or
page to page, or in some cases to highlight
an item or option in a list.
You can also scroll using the stylus. Tap an
onscreen scroll arrow, or drag the slider of
an onscreen scroll bar.
In list screens, use the 5-way
to
select and move between entries such as
notes, memos, contacts, or photos. In
individual entry screens—such as a single
photo or email message—use the 5-way to
move among the items on the screen or to
move to another entry.
The behavior of the 5-way for list screens
and entry screens varies according to
application. Here are some general
scrolling tips that apply in most
applications:
24
•
Press Right , Left , Up , or
Down to move to the next field,
button, or action in that direction.
•
In list screens, press and hold Up
or
Down to scroll one screen at a time.
•
When inside a text field, press Right
or Left to scroll to the next character
or word, press Up
or Down to
scroll between lines, or press and hold
to scroll one screen
Slider
Scroll arrows
Highlighting and selecting items
On most screens, one item—a button, a
list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by
default. The highlight identifies which item
is affected by your next action. Use the
5-way to move the highlight from one item
to another before opening or selecting it.
The highlight can take one of two forms,
depending on what is highlighted:
•
Border glow: When an onscreen button
(such as OK or Cancel) or pick list is
highlighted, the item displays a glow
around its border. If an entire list screen
2
CHAPTER
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
is highlighted, the glow appears at the
top and bottom of the screen only.
When a border appears at the top and
bottom of a list screen, press Center on the
5-way to highlight the first item in the list.
TIP
After you open an application (see
Opening applications), experiment with using
the 5-way to highlight various screen
elements.
TIP
Highlighting text
You can use the stylus to highlight text on
the screen.
•
•
Tap and drag the stylus across the text
you want to highlight.
•
To highlight a word, double-tap it.
•
To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.
Colored background: When a phone
Accessing command buttons
number, text, an email address, a web
link, or an item in a list is highlighted,
the item is displayed as white text
against a colored background. Examples
of lists include the Contacts list, the
Messaging Inbox, and the Tasks list.
In most applications, command buttons
such as New, OK, and Details appear at the
bottom of the screen. In many cases, you
can jump directly to these buttons instead
of scrolling to them.
After highlighting an item, you can select or
activate it by pressing Center
, or by
tapping the item with the stylus.
•
From a list screen, such as the Contacts
list or Memos list, press Right to
jump to the first button.
25
CHAPTER
2
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
•
From a screen where you create or edit
entries, such as Edit Contacts, press
Center
to jump to the first button.
•
From a dialog box, such as Edit
Categories, press Up
or Down
scroll to the buttons.
to
Dialog box A set of options and
command buttons that are enclosed by a
border and that enable you to carry out a
specific task.
KEY TERM
Selecting menu items
Many applications have menus to give you
access to additional features. These menus
are usually hidden from view, but they
appear when you press Menu
. To get
the most out of your Treo smartphone, it’s
a good idea to familiarize yourself with the
additional features available through the
various application menus.
1 Press Menu
to display an
application’s menus.
26
Menu shortcut
2 Press Right and Left
between menus.
to switch
3 Press Up
and Down
menu item.
to highlight a
4 Press Center
to select the menu
item, or press Menu
to close the
menu and cancel your selection.
Most menu items have menu shortcuts
listed in the menu. To use a menu shortcut,
press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don’t
have to see the menu item to use the menu
shortcut. For example, when you’re in
Calendar, you can press Menu + N to create a
new event.
TIP
Selecting options in a pick list
•
A range of options is often presented in a
type of menu called a pick list, which can
be identified by a downward-pointing
arrow. Pick lists are different from the
application menus previously described.
The application menus give you access to
additional features and pick lists let you
select the contents for a particular field.
Stylus: Use your stylus to tap the pick
list.
•
Tap the item you want from the list.
•
To exit the pick list without making a
selection, tap outside the list.
2
CHAPTER
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
You can select items from a pick list with
the 5-way or the stylus.
•
5-way: Use the 5-way
to highlight
the pick list, and then press Center
to display the items in the list.
•
Press Up
and Down
the item you want.
to highlight
•
Press Center
to select the
highlighted item.
•
To exit the pick list without making a
selection, press Left or Right .
27
CHAPTER
2
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
Using the keyboard
Backlight
Backspace
Option
Return
Shift/Find
Menu
Space
28
Alt
•
When using the keyboard, most people
find it easiest to hold the Treo smartphone
with two hands and use the tips of both
thumbs to press the keys.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? The Treo smartphone includes
a keyboard backlight that turns on and off
when the screen turns on or off. The backlight
also dims when an active call lasts longer than
a specified period of time. See Optimizing
power settings to adjust the automatic
shut-off and dimming intervals.
Entering lowercase and uppercase letters
•
To enter lowercase letters, press the
desired keys.
•
To enter an uppercase letter, press
Shift/Find
and then press a letter
key. You don’t need to press and hold
Shift while entering a letter. When Shift
is active, an up arrow
appears in the
lower-right corner of the screen.
To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/Find
twice. To turn it off, press Shift/
Find
once. When Caps Lock is on,
an underlined up arrow
appears in
the lower-right corner of the screen.
2
CHAPTER
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
Entering numbers, punctuation, and
symbols
Numbers, punctuation, and symbols
appear above the letters on the keys.
To enter these characters, do one of
the following:
Symbol
Letter
•
Press Option , and then press the
key with the desired character shown
above the letter. You don’t need to press
and hold Option while pressing the
second key. When Option is active, the
symbol appears in the lower-right
corner of the screen.
29
CHAPTER
2
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
•
To turn Option Lock on, press Option
twice. To turn it off, press Option
once. When Option Lock is on, the
symbol
appears in the lower-right
corner of the screen.
DID YOU KNOW? Some application views
automatically default to Option Lock, such as
the Dial Pad View in the Phone application or
the Calculator. In this case, you do not need
to press Option to enter numbers.
1 Enter the character that corresponds to
the symbol or accented character you
want. See the table on the next page.
2 Press Alt
4 Press Center
character.
Symbols and accented characters that do
not appear on the keyboard are sometimes
called alternate characters because they
are entered using the Alt
key.
30
to insert the
Alternate characters are
grouped by their similarity to the base key. For
example, the alternate characters for the e key
are é, è, ë, ê, and .
DID YOU KNOW?
Entering other symbols and accented
characters
.
3 Press Up , Down , Right , or
Left to highlight the desired
character.
0
Symbols and accented characters
Enter…
Then press
Alt
to
select…
Enter…
Then press
Alt
to
select…
Enter…
Then press
Alt
to
select…
a
áàäâãåæ
n
ñ
u
úùüû
A
ÁÀÄÂÃÅÆ
N
Ñ
U
ÚÙÜÛ
b or B
ß
o
óòöôœõ
x or X
x¤
c
碩
O
ÓÒÖÔŒÕ
y
ýÿ
C
Ç¢©
p or P
¶
Y
ÝŸ
e
éèëê
r or R
®
!
¡
E
ÉÈËÊ
s
ßš
?
¿
i
íìïî
S
ߊ
:
:-) :-( ;-)
I
ÍÌÏÎ
t or T
™
$
l or L
£
Press Alt
characters:
2
CHAPTER
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
£¥¢
by itself, after a space or at the beginning or end of a line, to select these
;_•\%=°÷
£¥¢[]{}<>«»©®™~^ø|
31
CHAPTER
2
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
Opening applications
Button
Primary application
Phone
When you open an application using either
Applications View or an application button,
you automatically close the application you
were previously using.
Calendar
Messaging
Using the quick buttons
The front of the Treo 700P smartphone has
three buttons that you can use to open
applications. The fourth button opens
Applications View (see Using Applications
View).
You can customize the quick buttons
yourself; see Reassigning buttons for details.
•
To access a button’s secondary
application, press Option
and then
press the quick button.
Buttons
Secondary application
+
Web
+
World Clock
+
Email
TIP
Phone
Calendar
Applications
Messaging
DID YOU KNOW? Pressing Option + Menu
dims your smartphone screen.
Each quick button opens two applications:
•
32
To access a button’s primary application,
simply press the button.
Using Applications View
You can access all available applications
through Applications View.
1 Press Applications
In Applications View, you can also do any of
the following:
•
Press Applications
repeatedly to
cycle through various categories of
applications. See Applications settings
for more info on categories.
•
Enter the first few letters of the
application’s name to highlight it. For
example, if you enter P it highlights
Phone; if you then enter R, it highlights
Prefs. If you pause and then enter R, it
highlights the first application that starts
with R.
.
2 Use the 5-way
to highlight the
application you want to use.
3 Press Center
application.
2
CHAPTER
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
to open the selected
33
CHAPTER
2
34
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
CHAPT ER
3
Your phone
The Phone application is your home base for making and receiving
calls and for storing info about the people you need to stay in
touch with.
You can creatively manage multiple calls, such as swapping
between calls, sending text messages to ignored calls, and
creating three-way conference calls. Your Palm® Treo™ 700P
smartphone helps you perform all these tasks with ease.
And you can do more than manage your phone calls, too. You can
send text messages, open applications, go to your favorite web
pages, see your upcoming appointments, and even find out how
many unread email messages you have.
Benefits
•
Stay in touch—you choose how
•
Save time with shortcuts to your
favorite info
•
Have fun: add wallpaper and
ringtones
In this chapter
Turning your smartphone on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Managing active calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Using a phone headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Customizing phone settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Turning your
smartphone on and
off
example, when you’re on a plane and want
to look at your calendar.
1 Press and release Power/End
wake up the screen.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
to
You can also press any of the quick buttons
or the Applications button to wake up your
smartphone screen.
TIP
NOTE Throughout this guide we use the
term smartphone to describe your device
and its physical aspects. We use the term
phone to describe the feature of your
smartphone that lets you connect to your
wireless service provider’s network to
make and receive calls and transmit data.
The phone and the screen of your
smartphone can be turned off and on
separately. This means that you can wake
up the screen to use just the organizer
features of your smartphone, without
turning on the phone. Also, when the
screen is turned off, the phone can be on
and ready for you to receive and make
calls.
Power/End
Center
2 Press Center
to turn off Keyguard.
For more info about turning Keyguard on
and off, see Locking your keyboard
(Keyguard).
3 Press and release Power/End
turn off the screen.
to
Waking up the screen
Wake up the screen and leave the phone
turned off when you want to use only the
organizer features of your smartphone; for
You can set how long the screen stays on.
Press Applications, select Preferences,
select Power, and then adjust the Auto-off
after setting.
TIP
37
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
your wireless service provider’s name
and the Signal Strength
icon
appear at the top of the screen,
indicating that you can use the phone
and Internet features (if supported by
the mobile network).
Turning your phone on and off
When your phone is on, it is connected to
your wireless service provider’s network
(provided you are in a coverage area) so
that you can make and receive phone calls
and use wireless services, such as email,
messaging, and the web browser. During
initial setup, your phone is on by default, so
you can use wireless services right away.
If you turn off your phone, you can still use
the organizer features such as Contacts
and Calendar, as well as the media
features, such as the pTunes music
application and Pics&Videos. This is
sometimes referred to as flight mode and
is ideal for airplane flights and maximizing
battery life.
1 Wake up the screen.
2 Press and hold Power/End
turn on your phone.
3 Press and hold Power/End
again to turn off your phone. When your
phone is off, Phone Off appears at the
top of the Phone application screen and
your smartphone is not connected to
any mobile network. You can still use
the nonwireless features of your
smartphone, such as Contacts,
Calendar, Tasks, and Memos.
to
If the Ringer switch is in the Sound On
position, you hear a series of tones when you
turn your phone on and off (see Silencing
sounds).
TIP
When your smartphone locates a signal
(provided you are in a coverage area),
38
If you’re outside a coverage area, No
Service appears in the upper-left corner.
TIP
Opening the Phone application
•
Press Phone
to open the Main
View of the Phone application.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
Status icons
Dial Pad
Favorite
buttons
Making calls
3 Tap Dial or press Send
the call.
to make
If you changed the wallpaper in the Main
View of the Phone application (see
Customizing the Main View in the Phone
application), you can still access the Dial Pad.
From the Main View of the Phone application,
press Send, and then select Dial Pad.
TIP
Your smartphone offers several options for
making calls. As you become familiar with
your smartphone, you’ll discover which
method you prefer.
Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad
1 Press Phone
.
2 Enter the phone number by tapping the
onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus.
You can paste numbers
directly into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from
another application and press Phone to
switch to the Dial Pad. Open the Edit menu
and select Paste. Press Send to dial.
DID YOU KNOW?
Dialing using the keyboard
1 Press Phone
.
2 Press the numbered keys to enter the
phone number. (You don’t need to press
Option.)
39
YOUR PHONE
CHAPTER
3
•
Last name (SMI for Smith)
•
First initial and last name (JSM for
John Smith)
For example, entering SM would display
Smilla Anderson, John Smith, and
Sally Martin. Entering JSM finds only John
Smith.
3 Press Send
to make the call.
Text appears
here as you
enter it
You can also press Center on the 5-way to
make the call.
TIP
Dialing by contact name
Before you can dial a call by contact name,
you must create some contacts (see
Adding a contact), or import them by
synchronizing (see Synchronizing
information—the basics).
1 Press Phone
.
2 Select the Contacts favorite button.
3 Using the keyboard, just start entering
one of the following for the contact you
want to call:
•
40
First name (JOH for John)
To restart your search, press Backspace to
delete letters you’ve entered. Or select
Cancel to return to the Main View.
TIP
4 Select the number you want to dial.
5 Press Send
to dial.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
DID YOU KNOW? If you want to be able to dial
by entering a contact name in the Main View
of the Phone application (instead of a phone
number), you can change a setting to do that
(see Customizing phone settings).
To see more info for a contact, highlight
the name and press Center on the 5-way to
view the address, company, and other details.
TIP
Dialing with a speed-dial favorite button
Your smartphone comes with a few
predefined speed-dial favorite buttons, but
you can also create your own favorites. See
Creating a speed-dial favorite button.
1 Press Phone
2 Press Down
.
to access Favorites.
3 Use the 5-way
to highlight the
speed-dial favorite you want.
Look for the
icon to distinguish a
speed-dial favorite from other types of
favorites.
To view more favorite buttons, repeatedly
press Down or Right on the 5-way to scroll to
other Favorites pages.
TIP
If you select a contact from
your Contacts list when you create a
speed-dial favorite, you can see all the
numbers for that contact. Highlight that
contact’s speed-dial favorite button and press
Space on the keyboard.
DID YOU KNOW?
4 Press Center
to make the call.
Dialing from a web page or message
Your smartphone recognizes most phone
numbers that appear on web pages or in
text or email messages.
1 Select the phone number on the web
page or in the message.
41
YOUR PHONE
CHAPTER
3
want to call, and then press Send
again to dial.
2 Press Center
to open the Dial
Number dialog box.
3 Select Dial to dial the number.
If you can’t use the 5-way or stylus to
highlight and dial a phone number on a web
page or in a message, it means that your
smartphone doesn’t recognize the number as
a phone number.
TIP
Redialing a recently called number
To dial the last number: From the Main
View in the Phone application, press and
hold Send
to dial the last number
you called.
To select from your most recently dialed
numbers: From the Main View in the
Phone application, press Send
to
open the Redial list, select the number you
42
To select from a chronological list of calls:
Select the Call Log favorite button. You can
also access the Call Log from the Main
View in the Phone application by pressing
Send
and selecting Call Log from
the Redial list.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
DID YOU KNOW? If an entry in your Call Log
supports text messaging, you can send a text
message to that number. Highlight the entry
in your Call Log, open the Record menu, and
then select Message to address a message
to the selected number.
Receiving calls
See a photo of the person calling you!
Learn how to assign a caller ID photo in
Assigning a caller ID photo.
TIP
To receive calls, your phone must be on.
This is different from having only the
screen turned on (see Turning your phone
on and off). When your phone is off, your
calls go to voicemail.
DID YOU KNOW? If music is playing and a call
arrives, the phone rings softly. The music
pauses automatically if you answer the call
and resumes when you hang up.
To answer a call, do one of the following:
•
Press Send
•
Select Answer.
.
•
Press the headset button (if the
headset is attached).
The headset button may work differently
on headsets other than the one provided with
your smartphone.
TIP
To ignore a call, do one of the following:
Send the call to voicemail: Press Power/
End
or select Ignore.
43
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
Send the caller a text message: Select
Ignore with Text. This option sends the
call to voicemail and opens a text message
addressed to the caller.
NOTE Sending text messages to land line
phones may not be supported.
To silence the phone while it is ringing, do
one of the following:
•
Press any key on your smartphone
except Send, Power/End, or the 5-way.
•
Slide the Ringer switch to the Sound
Off
position. This immediately
silences all system sounds, including
the ringer.
DID YOU KNOW? When you silence the ringer
while it is ringing, you can either answer the
call or let it ring through to voicemail.
Using voicemail
Your wireless service provider service
includes voicemail. Keep in mind that
airtime and other charges apply when
using voicemail from your smartphone.
44
Setting up voicemail
1 Make sure your phone is turned on (see
Turning your phone on and off).
2 Press Phone
.
3 Press and hold 1 or select the
Voicemail favorite button to dial your
wireless service provider’s automated
voicemail system.
4 Follow the voice prompts to set up your
voicemail.
Voicemail notification
When you have a new voicemail message,
you are notified with an Alert dialog box.
•
To dismiss the Alert dialog box, select
OK.
•
To play the message, select Listen.
When you have messages that you have
not listened to, a Voicemail
icon also
appears in the title bar of the Phone
application. You can select this icon to
listen to your voicemail.
If the voicemail icon stays in the title bar
after you listen to your messages, you can
clear the voicemail icon. Open the Options
menu, select Phone Preferences, and then
select Clear Voicemail Icon.
TIP
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
Managing active calls
Listening to voicemail messages
1 Press Phone
.
2 Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail
system, or select the Voicemail favorite
button.
3 Enter your voicemail password using
the keyboard.
Remember, you do not need to press
Option to enter numbers, *, or # while on a
call.
TIP
When you make or receive a call, Active
Call View appears.
Call
duration
Caller’s
name and
number
NOTE If you defined Extra Digits for the
Voicemail favorite button (see Editing a
favorite button for details), you can select
this button to enter your password.
45
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
If the screen dims during a call, press any
key except Power/End to restore the screen
brightness. Be careful not to press Power/End
to restore the screen brightness because this
ends the call.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? You can set how long the
screen stays at full brightness during phone
calls. See Optimizing power settings for
details.
Use the 5-way
or stylus to select the
onscreen buttons.Here’s what the buttons
do:
Ends the call immediately. You
can also press the headset
button (if the headset is
attached).
Turns on the speakerphone.
When the speakerphone is on,
you can take the smartphone
away from your ear and use
other features during a call. For
example, you can check your
calendar or look up contact info.
Turns off the speakerphone
when it is on.
46
Replaces the Spkr-phone button
when a Bluetooth headset is
attached. Select this button to
transfer the call from the
Bluetooth® headset to the
built-in earpiece.
Places the current call on hold.
Enables you to place another call
while the first call is on hold. For
information on handling a
second incoming call, see
Answering a second call (call
waiting).
Opens the Dial Pad so you can
manually dial additional
numbers, such as an extension
or a response to a voice prompt.
Dials any extra digits (such as a
password or an extension) that
you assigned to a favorite
button. This button replaces the
Dial Pad button during outgoing
calls to numbers that include
predefined extra digits. See
Defining favorite buttons for
information on defining extra
digits.
Mutes the microphone so that
you cannot be heard.
DID YOU KNOW? Do you accidentally press
onscreen buttons when you’re on a call? You
can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive
feature during active calls; see Locking your
screen.
Ending a call
Switching applications during a call
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
You can use many other applications on
your smartphone while holding a phone
conversation, including the organizer and
text messaging features. You cannot,
however, make a data connection while on
a call. This means that you cannot browse
the web or send and receive email
messages while on a call.
1 (Optional) If you want to continue
talking while viewing another
application, select Spkr-phone or
connect a headset (see Using a phone
headset).
2 Press Applications
.
3 Select the icon for the application you
want to open.
4 When you’re ready to leave the app,
press Phone
to return to Active Call
View.
Do one of the following:
•
Press Power/End
.
•
Select Hang Up All.
•
Press the button on the headset (if the
headset is attached).
TIP You can also press Phone to toggle
between Active Call View and Main View in
the Phone app, so you can access a favorite
during a call.
47
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
Saving phone numbers
After you complete an outgoing call to a
number that is not in your Contacts list,
you are prompted to add the number to
your Contacts list. You are also prompted
to add new numbers from incoming calls
with caller ID.
•
To disable the Add New Number
prompt, check the Don’t ask me this
again box.
You can turn the Add New Number
prompt on and off. From the Main View in the
Phone app, open the Options menu, and
select Phone Preferences. To turn this option
on, check the Ask to add unknown phone
numbers after calls box. To turn this option
off, uncheck this box.
TIP
If you don’t add a number right away, follow
these steps to add it later.
1 In the Call Log (see Redialing a recently
called number), highlight the number
you want to save.
•
•
•
48
To create a new contact entry for this
number, select Create a New Contact,
and enter the contact’s info.
To add this number to an existing
contact entry, select Add to a Contact,
and then select the contact. This pastes
the number into the first available phone
number field for that contact.
To decline adding this number, select
Cancel.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Add Contact.
4 Enter the information for the entry.
5 Select Done.
Making a second call
You can make a second call while your first
call is still active.
1 Dial the first number and wait until the
person answers.
2 Select Hold.
When the second call is an
outgoing call, you can conference the two
calls, but you cannot swap between them.
DID YOU KNOW?
3 Select Add Call.
4 Dial the second number using any of
the methods described in Making calls.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
When the second call is an incoming call, you
can swap between the two calls, but you
cannot conference them.
5 When the Dial another call prompt
appears, select Yes.
When two calls are active and you press
Power/End, you hang up both calls. If the
second call is an outgoing call, you can return
to the first call by waiting for the person on
the second call to hang up. If you accidentally
hang up both calls, your smartphone
automatically dials the number that was on
hold.
When two calls are active, Active Call View
includes two status lines, each
representing one of the calls.
Answering a second call (call waiting)
When you are on a call, you can receive a
second call. When the second call comes
in, you hear a call waiting tone and the Call
Waiting dialog box appears. You can do any
of the following to handle the second call:
•
To place the current call on hold and
answer the new call, press Send
or select Answer.
•
To send the new call to voicemail, select
Ignore.
49
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
•
To send the new call to voicemail and
send the caller a text message, select
Ignore with Text.
•
To hang up the current call and answer
the new call, press Power/End
.
After you answer a second call, you can
switch between the original call and the
second call by selecting Swap.
Making a conference call
When you are on a call and place a second
outgoing call, you can join the two calls in a
conference session, provided that the
service is available in your area. Please
contact your wireless service provider for
more information. Additional charges may
apply and minutes in your mobile account
may be deducted for each call you place.
1 While the first call is active, place a
second call.
2 Select Conf. This joins the two active
calls in a conference session.
50
3 To end the conference, press Power/
End
to end all the calls.
DID YOU KNOW? Pressing Send during a
conference call usually hangs up the second
call. However, depending on your network
connection, you may occasionally hang up the
first call.
using any of the methods described in
Making calls.
Using Flash mode during a call
Flash mode enables you to manually
manage your calls while one or more calls
are active. This mode is often used during a
conference call when one of the calls has
ended but the other remains connected.
1 Press Send
View.
•
If you have one active call and place
an outgoing second call, press Send
after establishing a connection
with the second party to set up a
conference session using three-way
calling.
•
If you have two calls in conference,
press Send
to hang up one of
the calls; you can then dial another
number and place the new caller into
the conference session.
from Active Call
2 If the Do you want to switch to Flash
mode prompt appears, select Yes.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
4 To exit Flash mode and end all the calls,
press Power/End
.
Forwarding calls
3 While in Flash mode, do any of the
following:
•
•
If you have one active call and answer
an incoming second call, press Send
to swap between the calls.
If you have one active call, to make an
outgoing second call, dial the number
You can forward calls to another phone
number. Please check with your wireless
service provider about availability and
pricing of forwarded calls; call forwarding is
not available in all areas, and additional
charges may apply.
1 Press Phone
.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select Phone
Preferences.
51
YOUR PHONE
CHAPTER
3
Defining favorite
buttons
Your Treo smartphone provides 70 favorite
buttons for quick access to the following
common tasks:
4 Select the Call Forwarding pick list and
select the forwarding number.
NOTE If the forwarding number isn’t in the
pick list, select Edit numbers, and then
select New. Enter a 10-digit forwarding
number (without spaces), and then select
OK. Now select the number from the Call
Forwarding pick list.
•
Dialing a phone number (speed dial)
•
Accessing your Call Log
•
Accessing the onscreen Dial Pad
•
Opening an application
•
Accessing a web page
•
Addressing a text or email message
•
Accessing voicemail (preset on your
Treo smartphone)
5 Select OK.
6 Call your smartphone to confirm that
call forwarding is active.
Your wireless service provider may preset
favorite buttons on your smartphone that
52
are customized for their services, and you
may not be able to edit or delete these
preset favorite buttons. However, you can
always customize the remaining favorite
buttons to perform any of the supported
tasks.
If you’re upgrading from a
previous Treo smartphone, your favorites may
be transferred along with your other info.
However, you may need to rearrange the
order in which your favorites appear by
opening the Record menu and then selecting
Edit Favorites Pages.
DID YOU KNOW?
3 Enter a label for the favorite:
•
If the entry is for an existing contact,
select Lookup. Start entering the last
name of the contact, and select the
contact when it appears in the lookup
list.
•
If the entry is for a new contact, enter
the label, press Down , and enter
the number.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
DID YOU KNOW? You can assign a special
ringtone for a contact. See Assigning a caller
ID ringtone for details.
Creating a speed-dial favorite button
1 Press Phone
2 Use the 5-way
favorite button.
.
to select a blank
If there are no blank buttons on the current
Favorites page, press Right on the 5-way to
scroll through the other pages. If all your
favorites are full, you can delete a favorite to
make room for a new one (see Deleting a
favorite button).
TIP
4 (Optional) Enter a Quick Key, which
you can press and hold from the Phone
application to instantly dial this
speed-dial number.
5 (Optional) Select More, and then select
advanced options:
Extra Digits: Defines additional digits to
dial, such as a password or extension.
To enter a one-second pause, insert a
53
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
comma between digits. To add a longer
pause, enter more commas.
Dial Extra Digits Automatically: Dials
predefined extra digits immediately
after dialing the phone number, when
checked.
When creating a Message or
Email favorite, you can enter multiple
addresses; simply separate each address with
a comma. This is an easy way to send
messages to a group of people.
DID YOU KNOW?
Editing a favorite button
6 Select OK.
1 Press Phone
Creating other types of favorite buttons
1 Press Phone
2 Use the 5-way
Favorites.
.
to access
to access
3 Highlight the favorite button you want to
edit.
3 Select a blank button.
4 Press Menu
4 Select the Types pick list and select Call
Log, Dial Pad, Application, Message,
Email, or Web Link.
5 Select Edit Favorites Button on the
Record menu.
5 Enter a label for the favorite and enter
any other necessary information on
the screen.
6 (Optional) Enter a Quick Key, which
you can press and hold to open the
favorite from the Phone application.
7 Select OK.
54
.
2 Use the 5-way
Favorites.
.
6 Make the desired changes. For
example, you can add a Quick Key,
which you can press and hold to
instantly open the favorite from the
Phone application.
7 Select OK.
You can also organize your buttons on
various Favorites pages. Open the Record
menu and select Edit Favorites Pages. Drag
and drop the buttons into a new slot. To move
a favorite to another page, drag the button
onto the page icon at the bottom of the
screen.
TIP
Deleting a favorite button
1 Press Phone
.
2 Use the 5-way
Favorites.
to access
3 Highlight the favorite button you want to
delete.
4 Press Menu
.
5 Select Edit Favorites Button on the
Record menu.
Using a phone
headset
You can connect a phone headset for
hands-free operation. If you need to use
your phone while driving and this is
permitted in your area, we recommend
using a phone headset (wired stereo
headset included) or a hands-free car kit
(sold separately).
In addition to the stereo headset included
with your Treo smartphone, your
smartphone is compatible with the
following types of headsets that are sold
separately:
•
Wired headsets with a 2.5mm
connector (3-pin or 4-pin)
•
Wireless headsets and car kits enabled
with Bluetooth 1.1 or 1.2 wireless
technology
6 Select Delete.
7 Select OK.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
The headset designed for Treo 180/270/
300 devices is not compatible with your Treo
700P smartphone.
TIP
55
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
Check the specifications for your headset
or car kit to confirm compatibility. When in
doubt, ask the manufacturer if the product
is compatible with Treo 700P smartphones.
To find compatible hands-free devices, go
to www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo.
Using a wired headset
Headset
button
Microphone
NOTE You cannot use a headset with
Bluetooth wireless technology to listen to
music files.
Speakers
If you want to use a stereo headset with a
3.5mm connector to listen to music files, then
you need to purchase a 2.5mm stereo
adapter. Visit www.palm.com/
treo700pcdma-mytreo for more info on audio
accessories.
TIP
When using the headset that is included
with your smartphone, you can press the
headset button to perform any of the
following tasks:
•
Answer an incoming call
•
Answer a call-waiting call
•
Pick up a call that is on hold
•
Switch between two calls (if the second
call is incoming)
•
Join two calls in a conference (if the
second call is outgoing)
•
Hang up all active calls
The headset button may work differently
on other headsets.
TIP
56
Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free
device
KEY TERM Partnership Two devices—for
example, your smartphone and a hands-free
device—that can connect because each
device finds the same passkey on the other
device. Once you form a partnership with a
device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to
connect with that device again. Partnership is
also known as paired relationship, pairing,
trusted device, and trusted pair.
Once you set up a partnership with a
Bluetooth headset or car kit, you can
communicate with that device whenever it
is turned on and within range. Bluetooth
range is up to 30 feet/10 meters in
optimum environmental conditions.
Performance and range may be reduced by
physical obstacles, radio interference from
nearby electronic equipment, and other
factors.
If you hear a headset buzz or experience
poor microphone performance, your headset
may be incompatible with your smartphone.
TIP
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Prepare your
headset or car kit to accept a connection
from another Bluetooth device. See the
documentation that came with your
hands-free device for instructions.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
1 Press Applications
and select
Bluetooth
or tap the Bluetooth
icon in the title bar.
2 Select Bluetooth On.
3 (Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your smartphone when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to recreate any
partnerships you already created.
4 Select Setup Devices.
57
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
5 Select Hands-free Setup.
7 After you finish setting up the device,
select Done to return to Trusted
Devices View.
NOTE For some car kits, you need to
initiate a Bluetooth connection from your
smartphone to complete the partnership
process. To do this, highlight the car kit in
Trusted Devices View, press Menu
,
and then select Connect.
6 Follow the onscreen instructions to
create a partnership with the specific
hands-free device. When prompted,
enter a passkey.
IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices
have a predefined passkey; if so, you can
find the passkey in the documentation for
that device. Other devices provide a screen
where you enter a passkey that you make
up. In either case, you must use the same
passkey on both your smartphone and your
hands-free device. We recommend that
where possible, you make up a passkey of
16 alphanumeric characters (letters and
numerals only) to improve the security of
your smartphone. The longer the passkey,
the more difficult it is for the passkey to be
deciphered.
58
8 (Optional) Enable advanced hands-free
features by pressing the multifunction
button (MFB) on the hands-free device.
You can tell the connection is successful
when you see a light blue headset icon in
the title bar of the Phone application. You
can now use your smartphone with the
Bluetooth hands-free device.
Using a Bluetooth hands-free device
After you create a partnership with your
Bluetooth hands-free device and you turn it
on within range (up to 30 feet/10 meters),
your smartphone automatically routes all
calls to the hands-free device instead of to
the earpiece on your smartphone. When a
call comes in, your smartphone rings and
the hands-free device beeps. Even if you
answer the call on your smartphone, the
call goes to the hands-free device. If you
prefer to route calls to the earpiece on your
smartphone, you can change the settings
on your smartphone to do this; see
Customizing advanced settings for your
hands-free device.
If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free
device and you want to return to the earpiece
during a call, select Cancel Bluetooth in
Active Call View. To return the call to the
hands-free device, open the Options menu
and select Connect Bluetooth.
TIP
The features of your hands-free device vary
by model. Check the documentation for
your hands-free device for details about
these features. Your smartphone can
support the following actions, provided that
your hands-free device also supports them:
•
Transfer a call from the earpiece on your
smartphone to the hands-free device
•
Ignore an incoming call
•
Redial the last number you called from
the hands-free device
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
If you have more than one
Bluetooth hands-free device, the last one you
connected to becomes the active device. To
switch between devices, disconnect the
active device before you try to connect to the
other device.
DID YOU KNOW?
Customizing advanced settings for your
hands-free device
You can set whether your hands-free
device automatically answer calls, provided
the device supports this feature.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
•
Answer an incoming call
2 Select Hands-free.
•
Hang up a call and answer a call-waiting
call
3 Do one of the following:
•
Place a call on hold and answer a
call-waiting call
•
Hang up a single call
and select
To send all calls to your hands-free
device: Check the Always route calls
to handsfree box. Select the Auto
answer pick list and select whether you
want your hands-free device to
59
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
automatically answer incoming calls and
how quickly it answers.
To choose between the earpiece on
your smartphone and your
hands-free device on a call-by-call
basis: Uncheck the Always route calls
to handsfree box. When the phone
rings, you can answer the call with your
hands-free device by pressing the
multifunction button on your hands-free
device, or you can answer the call with
the earpiece on your smartphone by
using the controls on your smartphone
(see Receiving calls).
Selecting ringtones
You can set various tones for various types
of incoming calls.
1 Press Phone
.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
4 Select the Application pick list and
select Ring Tones.
4 Select Done.
Customizing phone
settings
You can download any
compatible ringtone directly to your
smartphone (see Downloading files from a
web page). You can also download ringtones
to your computer and then email them to your
smartphone.
DID YOU KNOW?
60
5 Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
6 Select the Vibrate pick list and select
how you want your smartphone to
vibrate upon an incoming call.
7 (Optional) Uncheck the Escalate ring
tone volume box if you want the ring to
remain at the same volume regardless
of how long it rings.
8 Select ringtones from the following pick
lists:
Known Caller: An incoming call from
someone in your Contacts or Favorites.
3 Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
4 Select Manage.
5 Do one of the following:
•
To record a sound, select New.
•
To play a sound, select it with the
5-way
.
•
To delete a sound, highlight it and
press Backspace
.
•
To send a sound, highlight it and
select Send.
Unknown Caller: An incoming call from
someone identified by caller ID who is
not in your Contacts or Favorites.
Roaming: A special tone for incoming
calls when you’re outside your home
mobile network.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
6 Select Done twice.
9 Select Done.
You can also create a new sound by
selecting New in Sound & Alerts Preferences.
TIP
You can assign a ringtone to a
contact or an entire category of contacts.
Ringtones assigned to individual contacts
override the ringtone assigned to a category
of contacts.
DID YOU KNOW?
Selecting Phone alert tones
You can set various tones for various types
of alerts.
Creating and managing ringtones
1 Press Phone
.
You can also record sounds and use them
as ringtones.
2 Press Menu
.
1 Press Phone
.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
4 Select the Application pick list and
select Phone Alerts.
61
YOUR PHONE
CHAPTER
3
Adjusting call volume
While a call is in progress, press the
Volume button on the side of your
smartphone to adjust the call volume.
5 Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
6 Select the Vibrate pick list and select
how you want your smartphone to
vibrate upon an incoming call.
7 Select alert tones from the following
pick lists:
Voicemail Alert: Indicates that a new
voicemail message has arrived.
Coverage in/out: Indicates that you
moved into or out of a coverage area.
Volume button
Side
button
Adjusting ringer volume
When a call is not in progress and music is
not playing, press the Volume button on
the side of your Treo smartphone to adjust
ringer volume, and then press the Side
button to confirm your selection.
Signal faded: Indicates that the signal
lost strength and a call was dropped.
8 Select Done.
Assigning a caller ID photo
1 Press Phone
.
2 Select the Contacts favorite button.
3 Open the contact to whom you want to
give a caller ID photo.
62
4 Select Edit.
If you assign pictures to your
contacts in Microsoft Outlook or
®
Palm Desktop software and you install the
desktop software from the Palm Software
Installation CD, the pictures are automatically
added to your contact entries on your
smartphone when you sync. If you use
third-party synchronization software, picture
sync may not be supported. Check with the
software developer for information.
DID YOU KNOW?
5 Select the Picture box and do one of
the following:
•
Select Camera to take a photo and
add it to this contact entry when you
save the photo.
•
Select Photos and select an existing
photo that you want to assign to this
contact.
6 Select Done.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
Assigning a caller ID ringtone
Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is
calling before you even look at your
smartphone. This is a great way to identify
calls from important people in your life and
to screen calls you’d prefer not answer.
1 Press Phone
.
2 Select the Contacts favorite button.
3 Open the contact to whom you want to
give a caller ID ringtone.
4 Select Edit.
5 Select the Ringtone pick list and select
a tone for this contact entry.
63
YOUR PHONE
CHAPTER
3
3 Select Options, and then select Phone
Display Options.
4 Set any of the following options:
Show… : Sets whether the Dial Pad or
wallpaper appears in the Main View of
the Phone application. If you select
Show Wallpaper, select the thumbnail
image and then select an image to use
as wallpaper.
6 Select OK.
If you select the Show Wallpaper option,
you can still access the Dial Pad. From the
Phone application’s Main View, press Send to
open the Redial list, and then select Dial Pad.
TIP
You can assign a ringtone to an entire
category of contacts. For example, use a
special ringtone for categories such as Family,
Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category
pick list in the upper-right corner and select
Edit Categories. Select the category, and
then select the ringtone on the Edit Category
screen.
TIP
Customizing the Main View in the Phone
application
Phone Display Options let you customize
the appearance and entry mode of the
Main View in the Phone application.
64
1 Press Phone
.
2 Press Menu
.
You can also set the
background for the Calendar Agenda View.
See Customizing display options for your
calendar for details.
DID YOU KNOW?
Typing… : Sets whether typing enters
numbers in the Dial Pad or starts a
contact search.
If you select the Typing starts contacts
search option, you can still enter numbers in
the Dial Pad by pressing Option before
entering the first number.
TIP
Show Calendar event: Sets whether the
current event from the Calendar
application appears in the Main View of
the Phone application. When this option
is enabled, you can then select this
event to jump to the Calendar
application.
Show Favorite buttons: Sets whether
Favorites appear in the Main View of the
Phone application.
Rows: Sets the number of favorite
button rows that appear in the Main
View of the Phone application.
5 Select OK.
Setting your dialing preferences
Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix
to your phone numbers. For example, you
can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit
phone numbers. You can add a different
prefix based on the length of the phone
number.
1 Press Phone
.
2 Press Menu
.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
3 Select Options, and then select Dial
Preferences.
4 Set any of the following options:
Dialing from North America: Formats
phone numbers using North American
conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).
Always dial 1 in front of the area code:
Adds a 1 in front of 10-digit phone
numbers. This option is available only
when North American Dialing is
enabled.
International Prefix: Replaces the + sign
in front of International phone numbers
with the specified number.
To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to
7-digit numbers. For example, enter
your own area code to automatically add
your area code when you dial local
numbers.
65
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
To (6), (5), (4), digit numbers: Adds a
prefix to numbers with the specified
number of digits. For example, if all the
phone numbers in your office begin
with 555, followed by a 4-digit
extension, you can select 4, enter your
area code, and then enter 555 as the
prefix. When you want to call a
colleague, simply enter the colleague’s
4-digit extension. Your smartphone
automatically dials the area code and
555 plus the 4-digit extension. You can
also create contact entries with just the
extension number and then dial the
number from your Contacts list.
5 Select OK.
Choosing your privacy settings
To maintain privacy, you can choose
whether your longitude and latitude
position are available to the network and
third-party applications at all times or only
during an emergency call.
1 Press Phone
.
2 Press Menu
.
3 From the Options menu, select Phone
Preferences.
66
4 Select one of the following:
Location ON: Enables the network to
determine your longitude and latitude
position at any time in order to provide
location-specific services.
Emergency Only: Restricts your
location information to emergency
services only.
5 Select OK.
When Location ON is selected, the
Location
icon appears. When
Emergency Only is selected, a red slash
appears over the Location
icon.
Setting Roaming Preferences
Use Roaming Preferences to set specific
options for using your phone while
roaming. For example, you can set options
to be notified that you are roaming before
placing a call or making a data connection,
so that you are aware that you might incur
extra charges.
1 Press Phone
.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select
Roaming Preferences.
Home networks only: Lets your phone
connect to your home network only.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
Roaming networks only: Lets your
phone connect to roaming networks
only.
5 Check the boxes to enable either or
both of the following roaming warning
options:
Before outgoing calls: Displays an alert
warning you that you are on a roaming
network when you attempt to dial an
outgoing call.
4 Select the Network Selection pick list
and select the networks with which you
want to allow your phone to make a
connection:
Allow roaming: Lets your phone
determine the best network—either
home or roaming—with which to
connect.
Before data connections: Displays an
alert warning you that you are on a
roaming network when you attempt to
make a data connection, for example, to
browse the Web.
6 Select OK.
Enabling TTY
TTY (also known as a TDD or Text
Telephone) is a telecommunications device
that enables you to communicate by
telephone if you are deaf, hard of hearing,
or have speech or language disabilities.
67
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
Your device is compatible with select TTY
devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD
machine to your device through the
headset jack while this mode is enabled.
Please check with the manufacturer of your
TTY device for connectivity information and
to ensure that the TTY device supports
digital wireless transmission.
What are all those
icons?
1 Press Phone
.
2 Press Menu
.
Wireless Your phone is on and you are in
Service your wireless service provider’s
coverage area. If you are outside
Name
a coverage area, No Service or
Roaming appears instead.
No Service means that there is
no coverage at all and Roaming
means that another wireless
service provider’s network is
available. When you turn off your
phone, Phone Off appears.
3 From the Options menu, select Phone
Preferences.
4 Select the TTY/TDD pick list and select
one of the following modes:
Default Mode: Sends and receives text.
VCO Mode: Sends voice and receives
text. This is also known as Voice Carry
Over Mode.
HCO Mode: Sends text and receives
voice. This is also known as Hearing
Carry Over Mode
Off: Sends and receives voice.
5 Select OK. A red TTY icon appears in
the title bar of the Phone application
whenever TTY is enabled.
68
You can monitor the status of several items
using icons in the title bar of the Phone
application:
You are outside your wireless
service provider’s coverage area
and are roaming on another
wireless service provider’s
network. This icon appears in
addition to the word Roaming.
The icon may flash if the
provider is not on your wireless
service provider’s preferred
roaming list.
Your phone is on. The bars
display the signal strength. The
stronger the signal, the more
bars that appear. If you are
outside a coverage area, no bars
appear.
You are in an area that supports
1xRTT data services.
You are in an area that supports
EVDO data services.
Your phone is on and connected
to a 1XRTT network, but you are
not actively transmitting data.
You can still make and answer
calls.
Your phone is on and connected
to an EVDO network, but you
are not actively transmitting
data. You can still make and
answer calls.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
Your phone is on and a 1XRTT
data connection is active. You
can still make calls, but you
cannot answer calls (incoming
calls go to voicemail). When you
make a call the data
transmission is automatically
interrupted.
Your phone is on and an EVDO
data connection is active. You
can still make or answer calls.
When you make or answer a
call, the data transmission is
automatically interrupted, and
then it resumes when you end
the call.
You have new voicemail
messages. You can select this
icon to retrieve your messages.
69
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
You have a new alert, such as a
Calendar alarm or a new text
message. To view the alert,
press and hold Center
or
select the icon. See Viewing and
using the alerts.
TTY/TDD Mode is active. Use
this mode to communicate by
telephone if you are deaf or hard
of hearing or if you have speech
or language disabilities.
The Location setting is on and
your longitude and latitude
position are available to the
network and third-party
applications. When you select
the Emergency Only setting,
this icon appears with a red
slash and your location is
available only during emergency
calls.
Call forwarding is active.
70
The Bluetooth® wireless
technology icon appears in gray
when this feature is off, in blue
when this feature is on, and in
reverse blue when your
smartphone is communicating
with another Bluetooth device.
This icon replaces the Bluetooth
icon when your smartphone is
connected to a Bluetooth
headset or car kit. This icon
appears in dark blue when a call
is in progress and in light blue
when a call is not in progress.
This icon replaces the Bluetooth
icon when a dial-up networking
connection using Bluetooth
wireless technology is active.
Your battery is partially drained.
When the battery drains to 20%
of its capacity, the icon changes
from blue to red. At 10% of its
capacity, you begin to receive
warning messages, and at 5%
of its capacity, the smartphone
beeps (if the Ringer switch is in
the Sound On position) and the
icon changes from red to clear.
Your battery is charging. The
lightning bolt turns from red to
green when the battery is fully
charged and your smartphone
remains connected to the
charger.
Displays the current (or next)
event from the Calendar
application. If you have an event
conflict during the current time
period, a red bar appears next to
the event description. To jump to
the current event in the Calendar
application, select the Calendar
status line (see Displaying your
calendar for details).
Your battery is fully charged and
your smartphone is not
connected to the charger.
You have new text messages.
The numbers next to the icon
indicate the number of unread
messages in your Inbox. You can
select this icon to retrieve your
messages.
You have new email messages.
The numbers next to the icon
indicate the number of unread
messages in your Inbox. If you
set up multiple email accounts
on your smartphone, this
number reflects the account that
was most recently accessed.
You can select this icon to
retrieve your messages.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
KEY TERM 1xRTT (Single carrier [1x] radio
transmission technology): A wireless
technology that can provide fast data transfer
and Internet access with average speeds of
60– 80Kbps and bursts up to 144Kbps.
KEY TERM EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized): A
wireless broadband technology that is
designed for very high-speed data transfer
with average download speeds of 400–
700Kbps, capable of reaching speeds up
to1.8Mbps, and upload speeds up to 156Kbps.
DID YOU KNOW? You can tap the Bluetooth
icon to quickly turn Bluetooth wireless
features on and off.
To display the remaining battery power,
tap the battery icon at the top of the screen.
TIP
71
CHAPTER
3
72
YOUR PHONE
CHAPT ER
4
Your email and other
messages
You already know how efficient email and messaging are for
staying in touch. Now your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone
brings you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy
the ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and
colleagues anywhere you can access your wireless service
provider’s data network.
You can send photos to your friends and family, or create
Microsoft Word or Excel files and send them to your
colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit
at your convenience.
Benefits
•
Access email on the go
•
Send and receive photos, sound
files, Word and Excel files, and
more
•
Save messages from your
computer to view at a convenient
time
In this chapter
Which application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
The VersaMail application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Which application
should I use?
Your smartphone includes the VersaMail®
application (called Email in Applications
View), which you can use to access your
corporate, personal, and fee-based Internet
email. You can also access web-based
email, like Yahoo! Mail or Hotmail, from the
web browser on your smartphone.
NOTE Your wireless service provider may
offer additional email applications that are
compatible with your Treo 700P
smartphone. Contact your wireless service
provider’s customer service department for
more info.
An email application is not an email
provider. It works with an account from a
provider to transfer messages to
your smartphone.
TIP
Email provider The service you
use to send and receive email. Your email
provider’s name appears between the @
symbol and the dot symbol in your email
address.
KEY TERM
BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must activate
data services on your wireless service
provider account before you can use email
on your smartphone.
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
The VersaMail
application
Before you can use VersaMail, you need to
enter your email account settings. If you
have multiple email accounts, you must
enter settings for each email account.
You can find additional information on using
and customizing VersaMail in the User
Guide for the VersaMail Application on your
computer.
Windows: Start>Programs>Palm
Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD and
click the link to the User Guide for the
VersaMail Application in the
Documentation folder.
75
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
How do I get started?
1 If either of the following is true, read the
User Guide for the VersaMail
Application on your computer:
•
You used the VersaMail application on
your previous Palm OS® device, and
you want to transfer those settings to
your smartphone.
•
You plan to use VersaMail to access
an email account on a Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync server, a Lotus
Notes server, or a Microsoft MAPI
server.
2 If your email provider is listed here, then
skip to Setting up VersaMail to work
with common providers.
Mail.com, NetZero, RCN, SBC/PacBell,
SBC/Prodigy, Verizon DSL, and Yahoo!
3 If your email provider’s name is not
listed, then you need to obtain the
following info from your system
administrator or ISP, and then skip to
Setting up VersaMail to work with other
providers:
•
Mail protocol: POP or IMAP
•
Incoming and outgoing mail server
names, such as mail.myisp.com
•
Incoming and outgoing mail server
port numbers, such as 110 (incoming
POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25
(outgoing POP or IMAP)
•
(If necessary) Security settings: APOP,
ESMTP, SSL
Australia: Bigpond Mail and OptusNet
Brazil: UOL
The correct protocol, server, and security
settings are required for VersaMail to be able
to send and receive email for your account.
Your email provider can easily provide these
settings. You may be able to find this account
setup info on your email provider’s website.
TIP
Canada: Rogers High Speed and
Sympatico
Mexico: Yahoo!
United States: AOL, Apple.Mac, AT&T
Global, AT&T Worldnet, Bell South,
Cablevision, Charter, Comcast,
CompuServe, Covad, EarthLink,
76
Setting up VersaMail to work with
common providers
1 Press Applications
and select
Email
to open the VersaMail
application.
2 If the Initial Setup dialog box appears,
select Continue.
3 Make up a name that describes this
account and enter it in the Account
Name field. For example, Work Email.
4 Select the Mail Service pick list, and
then select your email provider, such as
Earthlink, and then select Next.
address. Check with your email provider if
you are not sure what to enter as your
username.
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
6 Select the Password box, enter your
email account password, select OK, and
then select Next.
7 Select Next, and then select Done.
To enter settings for another email
account, open the Accounts menu and select
Account Setup.
TIP
Setting up VersaMail to work with other
providers
1 Press Applications
and select
Email
to open the VersaMail
application.
2 If the Initial Setup dialog box appears,
select Continue.
5 Enter the username for your email
account. Your username appears before
the @ symbol in your email address.
NOTE For some email providers, such as
Gmail, your username is your entire email
3 Make up a name that describes this
account and enter it in the Account
Name field. For example, Work Email.
4 Select the Mail Service pick list, and
then select Other.
5 Select the Protocol pick list, select POP
or IMAP (based on the info you got from
77
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
your system administrator or ISP), and
then select Next.
settings, select Advanced, and then
enter those settings.
TIP You can also select Advanced to set more
options for incoming and outgoing messages.
10 Select Done.
Creating and sending messages
1 From the Inbox, select New.
6 Enter the username for your email
account. Your username appears before
the @ symbol in your email address.
NOTE For some email providers, such as
Gmail, your username is your entire email
address. Check with your email provider if
you are not sure what to enter as your
username.
7 Select the Password box, enter your
email account password, select OK, and
then select Next.
8 Enter your email address and the
names of the incoming and outgoing
mail servers, and then select Next.
9 If your system administrator or ISP
provided port numbers or security
78
2 Begin entering one of the following for
the addressee:
•
Email address
•
First name
•
Last name
If you enter address info that matches one
or more of your contacts, VersaMail displays
the matching contacts. To accept a
suggestion, select the correct contact. To
send to a different address, keep entering the
email address or name.
TIP
3 Enter the subject and message text.
To move between fields, press Up or
Down on the 5-way.
TIP
4 Select one of the following:
Send: Connects and sends all
messages immediately. If the message
cannot be sent for any reason, the
message is stored in your Outbox.
.
To remove an attachment, select the file in
the Attachments box, and then select
Delete.
TIP
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
Attaching photos and videos
Outbox: Stores the message to be sent
later.
1 Create the message to which you want
to attach the photo or video.
Drafts: Saves the message so you can
continue working on it at another time.
2 On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3 From the Type pick list, select Photo/
Video.
DID YOU KNOW? VersaMail makes up to five
attempts to send a message; if it is still not
successful, an alert message appears and you
must try to manually send the message again.
Adding attachments to your messages
You can attach several types of files to your
email messages.
4 On the Select Media screen, select the
Album pick list to go to the album
containing the photo or video you want,
and then check the box to the left of the
photo or video.
5 Select Done.
79
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
.
To attach more than one file to a message,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
TIP
Attaching ringtones
1 Create the message to which you want
to attach the ringtone.
2 On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3 From the Type pick list, select Sounds.
TIP Ringtones that are copy-protected appear
in the Sounds application with a lock icon. You
can use these ringtones on your phone, but
you cannot send them as attachments.
4 Select the ringtone you want, and then
select Insert.
3 From the Type pick list, select
Documents.
4 Select the file you want on the
Documents screen.
5 Select Done.
Attaching other types of files
1 Create the message to which you want
to attach the item.
2 On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3 From the Type pick list, select the type
of file to attach—for example, Address,
Appointment, or Memo/Text.
4 Select the item you want from the list in
the Type box.
5 Select Done.
5 Select Done.
Receiving and viewing messages
Attaching Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and
PDF files
1 From any mailbox, select Get or Get &
Send.
1 Create the message to which you want
to attach the file.
2 From the Inbox, select the message you
want to view.
2 On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
80
Replying to or forwarding messages
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
When you respond to messages, you can
select whether to include the original text
(see Customizing your email settings).
The VersaMail application
sends all messages as plain text only, with all
HTML tags stripped, even if you are
forwarding or replying to a message that was
originally received as HTML.
DID YOU KNOW?
1 From the Inbox or another folder, open
the message you want to respond to.
2 In Message View, select Reply. Select
whether to reply to just the sender or to
reply to both the sender and all
addressees on the message.
3 Enter your reply.
3 If a large incoming message is
truncated, select More
.
4 Select Send.
You can also tap the folder icon to the left
of the attachment name to open a menu of
tasks you can do with the attachment,
including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on
the attachment file type; Save to card to save
the attachment to an expansion card; or select
Viewer to select the application you want to
use to view the attachment.
TIP
When viewing a message, tap the scroll
arrows at the top of the screen to view the
previous or next message.
TIP
4 Select Done.
81
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
Viewing attachments
You can also tap the folder icon to the left
of the attachment name to open a menu of
tasks you can do with the attachment,
including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on
the attachment file type; Save to card to save
the attachment to an expansion card; or select
Viewer to select the application you want to
use to view the attachment.
TIP
There are a number of attachment types
you can open with the built-in software
on your smartphone (for example,
Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint
files; PDF files; ringtones, and photos).
1 From any folder, open the message with
the attachment you want to view.
Messages with downloaded
attachments appear with a paper clip
icon to the left of the message icon.
If an attachment is not downloaded
because it is larger than your maximum
message size, the paper clip icon does not
appear, and the attachment does not display
at the bottom of the message screen. Select
More to download and display any
attachments.
TIP
2 Tap the attachment name at the bottom
of the message screen to view it in the
default viewer on your smartphone.
3 When you finish with the attachment,
select Done to return to the
Attachments dialog box.
NOTE If there is no Done button, press
Applications
and select Email
return to the account’s Inbox.
Managing your messages
The status icons that appear near the
messages in your Inbox indicate the
following:
0
The message is unread when the
subject appears in bold.
The message includes an
attachment.
The message includes a meeting
invitation.
82
to
This message has high priority.
You can rearrange the message list to
make it easier to find and view messages.
•
•
In the Inbox, select Sort, and then
select one of the following: Sort by
Date, Sort by Name, Sort by Subject.
To quickly switch between folders in list
view, select the folder pick list at the
top of the screen and select the desired
folder.
Deleting selected messages from the
Inbox
When you delete a message from the
Inbox, it moves to the Trash folder.
1 Select the bullet next to the icon of each
message that you want to delete. To
select adjacent messages, drag the
stylus so it touches the bullet to the left
of each message. Lift the stylus and
drag again to select more adjacent
messages.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Delete on the Message menu.
4 If a confirmation dialog box appears,
select OK to confirm deletion.
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
To delete a single message, select the
envelope icon next to the message, and then
select Delete from the list.
TIP
Deleting messages by date
You can quickly delete a group of
messages by selecting a range of dates.
1 Press Menu
.
2 Select Delete Old on the Message
menu.
3 Select the folder and a date range for
the messages you want to delete.
4 Select OK.
5 If a confirmation dialog box appears,
select OK to confirm deletion.
To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open
the Message menu and select Empty Trash.
TIP
Switching accounts
If you create more than one email account
in VersaMail, you need to switch from
account to account to get, send, and
83
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
otherwise manage the messages in each
account.
1 Press Menu
.
2 Select Accounts, and then select an
account.
If you assigned VersaMail to a
quick button, you can press that button
repeatedly to switch between your different
email accounts.
DID YOU KNOW?
Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD and
click the link to the User Guide for the
VersaMail Application in the
Documentation folder.
Scheduling Auto Sync
You can set up VersaMail to automatically
download new email messages to your
smartphone with the Auto Sync feature.
You need to set up a separate Auto Sync
schedule for each email account. This feature
may not work with email accounts that require
VPN connection.
TIP
Customizing your email settings
You can customize the VersaMail settings
for each individual email account on your
Treo. The preferences you set apply only to
the email account you are currently
viewing. If you have multiple accounts,
configure each account separately.
You can set up a schedule to automatically
retrieve email messages; set preferences
for how and when messages are retrieved;
add a signature to an outgoing message;
and more. For complete information on all
of the email settings you can customize,
see the User Guide for the VersaMail
Application on your computer.
Windows: Start>Programs>Palm
84
1 Press Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3 Select Auto Sync.
4 Check the Auto-sync box.
5 Select the Every pick list and select the
time interval, from 5 minutes to
12 hours.
1 From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
.
NOTE If you set a more frequent interval,
2 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
you may need to recharge your Treo battery
more often.
4 Check the Alert me of new mail box.
6 Select the Start Time and End Time
boxes, and then select the hour, the
minute, and AM or PM to enter the time
for the first and last Auto Sync to take
place. Select OK.
7 Select the days you want the schedule
to be active. You can choose any
number of days, but you can set up only
one schedule for each email account.
8 Select OK, and then select Get Mail.
After you set up a scheduled Auto Sync
and select Get Mail, from then on, only new
messages are retrieved during Auto Sync.
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
3 Select Alerts.
To receive notifications of successful Auto
Sync retrievals only, uncheck the Alert me of
auto sync failures box. Leave the box
checked if you want to receive notifications of
both successful and failed Auto Sync
retrievals.
TIP
5 Select the Alert Sound pick list, and
then select a sound. Your Treo plays a
brief demo of the sound.
6 Select OK.
TIP
Selecting alert tones
When you schedule Auto Sync for a given
account, you can choose a sound—such as
a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you
know when new email arrives.
Setting preferences for getting messages
1 From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3 Select Incoming.
85
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
CHAPTER
4
The POP protocol does not support
retrieval of only unread mail from the server. If
you have a POP email account, VersaMail
downloads all messages regardless of
whether you have read them, and regardless
of whether the Unread messages box is
checked.
TIP
4 Set any of the following preferences,
and then select OK.
Get: Indicates whether to get message
subjects only or entire messages.
Ask Every Time: Indicates if you want
to see a dialog box for selecting
subjects only or entire messages each
time you retrieve email. If the box is
unchecked, messages are retrieved
according to the option you select in the
Get pick list.
Unread messages (IMAP accounts
only): Downloads only unread mail to
your smartphone. If you don’t check this
box and you select Get & Send, all the
messages on your mail server are
downloaded to your Inbox, including
messages you’ve read.
86
Mail from last: Gets messages sent
within the number of days you specify.
Download attachments: Automatically
downloads files attached to email,
except for attachments that exceed the
maximum message size.
Maximum message size: Sets the
maximum size of an incoming email
message. Enter the size in kilobytes
(KB). The default is 5KB, but you can
enter any size up to 2048KB
[approximately 2 megabytes (MB)],
including attachments. The maximum
message size that you can retrieve is
60KB for the body text and
approximately 5MB of total data for any
attachments.
Message Format: Sets the format for
messages you retrieve.
HTML: Displays messages sent in
HTML format with basic formatting
intact and displays other messages as
plain text.
Text: Displays all messages as plain
text, regardless of the format in which
they were sent.
Attaching a signature to a message
You can attach a personal signature, with
info like your company’s address and
phone numbers, to the bottom of all
messages you send.
1 From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3 Select Signature.
4 Check the Attach Signature box.
5 Enter your signature information, and
then select OK.
on your smartphone to directly access
corporate groupware information in
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003. You can
synchronize business email, calendar, and
contact info with Exchange Server 2003
from your smartphone without using a
desktop computer.
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
When you create a Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync account in the VersaMail
application, your email, calendar, and
contact info sync directly with Exchange
Server; information does not sync with the
desktop software application on your
computer, such as Microsoft Outlook or
Palm Desktop software. Other information
that is stored on your computer, such as
tasks and memos, continues to
synchronize with your desktop software.
For complete info on using a Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync account, see the
User Guide for the VersaMail Application
on your computer.
Windows: Start > Programs > Palm
Working with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with
the VersaMail, Calendar, and Contacts apps
Mac: Insert the Palm Installation CD and
click the link to the User Guide for the
VersaMail Application in the
Documentation folder.
87
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
Messaging
2 Select New.
3 Select the To field to address the
message:
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your
phone is turned on (see Turning your phone
on and off).
You can use the Messaging application to
exchange brief text messages (SMS) with
other devices and email addresses that
support this form of messaging. Before
you use your smartphone to send or
receive messages, refer to your service
plan for pricing and availability of
messaging services.
DID YOU KNOW? You can address messages to
multiple recipients by separating the
addresses with a comma. If you address a
single message to three people, you will be
billed for three messages.
Creating and sending a text message
Each text message can hold up to 160
characters. (If you send a text message to
an email address, the email address is
deducted from the 160-character count.)
1 Press Messaging
88
.
•
Press Center
. If the recipient’s
name appears in the list of recent
addresses, select it from the list.
•
If the recipient is in your Contacts list,
enter the first initial and last name (no
spaces), and then select the
recipient’s phone number or email
address, depending on where you
want to send the message.
•
If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list
of recent addresses or your Contacts
list, enter the phone number, or email
address.
If you see numbers when you expect to
see letters (or the other way around), you
need to turn Option Lock on by pressing
Option twice or turn it off by pressing Option
once.
TIP
4 Enter your message or select
QuickText
to insert predefined
phrases. To insert emoticons, select
.
Receiving messages
To add a new QuickText phrase, select
Edit QuickText from the list.
TIP
NOTE Some symbols can’t be used in text
messages. The Messaging application
automatically replaces invalid characters.
5 (Optional) Press Menu
, and then
select High Priority from the Compose
menu to mark the message as urgent.
6 Select Send.
TIP Select Save as Draft to save a draft of the
message without sending it. To access the
draft, select the folder list in the title bar and
select Drafts.
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
When your phone is turned on and in an
area of wireless coverage, you
automatically receive new text messages.
You can also configure how your
smartphone notifies you when a new
message arrives (see Selecting Messaging
alert tones).
The new message alert may include any of
the following buttons:
OK: Dismisses the alert and places the
message in your Inbox.
Reply: Opens Chat View, where you
can reply with a text message.
Call Back: Dials the sender’s phone
number.
89
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
Go To Msg: Opens the message so you
can view its full contents.
Your smartphone automatically launches
the appropriate application from the link.
Delete: Moves the message from your
Inbox to the Deleted folder.
Arranging your messages
When you receive a message, you can
also press Send to call the sender.
TIP
You can rearrange the messages in any
folder by using the Sort command.
1 Press Messaging
.
If you have multiple alerts, the Alert
screen displays all your pending alerts. Select
an item’s description to jump to that item, or
check the box to clear that item. To view all
your pending alerts from any screen on your
smartphone, press and hold Center on the
5-way.
TIP
Using links in messages
When you receive a text message that
contains a telephone number, email
address, or URL, you can dial the number,
send an email message, or go to the web
page immediately.
1 Press Messaging
.
2 Select the message that contains the
link you want to use.
3 Select the phone number, email
address, or URL (appears as underlined
blue text).
90
2 Select the folder list in the title bar and
select the folder you want to sort.
3 Press Menu
.
4 Select View, and then select Sort by
Name or Sort by Date.
Deleting messages
You can delete several messages at once
from any folder by using the Purge
command.
1 Press Messaging
.
2 Select the folder list in the title bar and
select the folder that contains the
messages you want to delete.
3 Press Menu
.
4 Select Purge from the Message menu.
5 Select the Purge pick list, and then
select an option.
6 Select OK.
You can carry on multiple chats at the same
time and easily switch between them,
using the pick list at the top of the screen.
1 Press Messaging
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
.
2 Do one of the following:
Start a new chat: Select a message
and reply to it.
Continue an existing chat: Select a
message with the chat
icon.
Chatting with Messaging
DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text
messages even while you are on a phone call.
This is easiest when using a hands-free
headset or the speakerphone.
When you exchange more than one
message with a single contact, the
messages you exchange with that person
are grouped into a chat session. When you
select a chat session from your message
list, the upper part of Chat View displays all
messages you’ve exchanged with this
contact, and the lower part provides an
entry area.
3 Enter your message.
Pale gray text indicates that a message is
pending or enroute.
TIP
4 Select Send.
91
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
Customizing your Messaging settings
1 Press Messaging
2 Press Menu
.
5 Select the Chat tab and set any of the
following preferences for chat sessions.
.
3 From the Options menu, select
Preferences.
4 On the Messages tab, set any of the
following preferences for your individual
messages:
Create chats from messages: Indicate
when you want to group messages
from the same person into a chat.
Show timestamps in chats: Indicate
whether you want to see the local date
and time the message was sent next to
each message.
Confirm message deletions: Indicate
whether you want deletion confirmation
prompts to appear.
Privacy Mode (hide text): Indicate
whether you want the body text to
appear in the alert when you receive a
new message, or if you want the alert
to hide the text and prompt you to go to
the message.
92
Display my name in chat window as:
Enter the name you want to use as the
label for your messages in Chat View.
Label color: Select a color to
differentiate your messages from the
sender’s messages while in Chat View.
Use color for: Indicate whether you
want both your name and message text
in the selected label color, or only your
name.
6 Select OK.
Selecting Messaging alert tones
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a
silent alert that can vibrate even when the
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off.
1 Press Messaging
2 Press Menu
.
6 Select the Vibrate pick list and select
how you want your smartphone to
vibrate upon an incoming message.
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
7 Select the Message Tone pick list and
select a tone for incoming message
alerts.
8 Check the boxes if you want to see
onscreen alerts when a new message
arrives and when a message you sent is
received.
9 Select Done.
.
3 Select Options, and then select Alerts.
What are all those icons?
By default, the Messaging app shows the
Inbox folder. To view a different folder, select
the folder list in the title bar and select a
different folder from the list.
TIP
The message descriptions in the Inbox,
Outbox, and Sent folders show the
message status:
4 Select the Application pick list and
select Messaging.
5 Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
•
Unread messages appear in bold.
•
Read messages appear in plain text.
•
Urgent messages appear with a red
exclamation point (!).
93
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
The following icons show the message
type and additional status info:
A text message
A message that was sent to
multiple recipients, and only some
of the recipients received the
message
An outgoing message with an error
A chat session
A voicemail page
If you are outside a coverage
area or if your phone is turned off, outgoing
messages go into the Outbox. When you
return to a coverage area or turn your phone
back on, your pending messages are sent
automatically and transferred to the Sent
folder.
DID YOU KNOW?
An incoming message with an error
A message that is waiting to be
sent
A message that was successfully
sent
94
CHAPT ER
5
Your connections to the web
and wireless devices
You use the web for many things: driving directions, shopping,
news, web-based email. Now, with your wireless service
provider’s network and the built-in web browser, you can take
the web with you almost anywhere.
The built-in Bluetooth® feature of your Palm® Treo™ 700P
smartphone helps you easily set up wireless connections to a
number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of
cable-free connectivity. You can also use your smartphone to
share contacts or your favorite photos with other people.
Benefits
•
Carry the web with you
•
Store web pages for offline
viewing
•
Connect to Bluetooth devices
In this chapter
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Connections with Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Web browser
The Blazer® web browser on your
smartphone provides quick and easy
access to web pages. You can view most
sites you use on your computer, including
those with security and advanced features,
such as JavaScript and frames. To browse
the web, you must activate data services
from your wireless service provider.
pages into a single column and resizes
images on your screen. This way, you can
see most content without scrolling left or
right.
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
You can send email from a
web page on your smartphone. Email
addresses appear as links on web pages.
After you configure an email application on
your smartphone, you can select an email
address link to create a message to the
selected address.
DID YOU KNOW?
You can visit secure websites.
The security certificates and 128-bit Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption let you
browse secure sites, such as online shopping,
banking, and email. Remember: Some secure
sites also require specific browsers and may
not work with the web browser application.
DID YOU KNOW?
DID YOU KNOW? The web browser supports
JavaScript, SSL strong encryption, and
cookies, but does not support plug-ins (such
as Flash or Shockwave) or Java applets.
Viewing a web page
The web browser uses patent-pending
technology to optimize web pages for your
smartphone. By default, the browser is in
Optimized Mode, which reformats web
1 Make sure your phone is turned on (see
Turning your phone on and off).
2 Press Phone
and confirm that data
services are available. You should see
either the 1XRTT
or EVDO
icon
in the title bar.
97
CHAPTER
5
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
If you do not see a 1XRTT or EVDO icon,
data services are not available in your
current location and you cannot connect
to the Internet.
3 Press Applications
Web
.
and select
4 Enter a web page address (URL) in the
Address Bar and select Go.
NOTE If you browse to a secure web
page, a lock
Address Bar.
icon appears in the
5 Do any of the following to navigate
within the web page:
View a page in wide layout format (as
on your computer): Press Menu
,
select Options, and then select Wide
Page Mode.
pressing Left or Right and then
press Center
to go to the selected
page. In Wide Page mode, use the
stylus to select a link.
Submit a form: Enter the info and then
select the onscreen button to submit
the form. If the form doesn’t have an
onscreen button, press Return .
To adjust the font size, open the Options
menu and select Font. To fit more text on the
screen, select Small. To make the text easier
to read, select Large.
TIP
6 Use the 5-way
to access any of
the following icons in the title bar:
Goes to the previous web page.
Goes to the next web page.
Scroll through the page: In Optimized
Mode (the default format which is
optimized for your smartphone screen),
press Up
or Down . In Wide Page
Mode, press Up , Down , Left ,
or Right to scroll in all directions.
Follow a link to another web page: In
Optimized Mode, highlight the link by
98
Refreshes the page with the
latest content from the Internet.
Opens a list where you can
select Fast Mode (no images or
style sheets) or Normal Mode
(with images and style sheets).
Opens a dialog box where you
can enter a web address you
want to go to or view a list of
recently viewed web pages.
Goes to your home page.
To find a recent page or search, select the
Address Bar pick list and select the item from
the list.
TIP
Want to get to the icons faster? Press
Space to jump to the Address Bar and then
press Up on the 5-way to scroll to the icons.
You can also press Menu to access the same
commands from the menus.
TIP
You can customize the Fast Mode
settings. See Customizing your web browser
settings for details.
quickly. Note that a bookmark is different
from a favorite (see Defining favorite
buttons).
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
The predefined bookmarks
take you to pages that are optimized for your
smartphone.
DID YOU KNOW?
1 Go to the page you want to bookmark.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Add Bookmark from the Page
menu.
4 (Optional) Change the entries in the
Name and Description fields.
5 Select OK, and then select OK again.
TIP
Tap and hold the Back or Forward buttons
or select these buttons with the 5-way to pop
up a list of sites you’ve visited.
TIP
Creating a bookmark
With bookmarks you can instantly access a
web page without entering the address
every time. The web browser can store up
to 100 bookmarks or saved pages, allowing
you to open your favorite web pages
99
CHAPTER
5
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
Saving a page
You can use the web browser to save a
page for offline viewing, so you don’t need
a wireless connection to view it later.
1 Go to the page you want to save.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Save Page from the Page menu.
4 Select OK, and then select OK again.
Viewing bookmarks or saved pages
Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in
Bookmarks View. Saved pages are
indicated by a small triangle in the
upper-right corner of the bookmark.
You can make Bookmarks
View the default view when you open the
browser. Open the Options menu and select
Preferences. Select the Start With pick list
and select Bookmarks.
DID YOU KNOW?
1 Select the Bookmarks View
icon.
2 Select the bookmark or saved page you
want to view.
100
To go back to the last web page you
viewed without selecting a bookmark, select
Page View.
TIP
Editing or deleting a bookmark or saved
page
1 From Bookmarks View, press
Menu
.
2 Select Edit Bookmarks on the
Bookmarks menu.
3 Select the bookmark you want to edit or
delete.
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
Your wireless service provider may preset
bookmarks on your smartphone that are
customized for their services. You may not be
able to customize some of the preset
bookmarks. If you can’t edit, delete, or beam
a bookmark, it is probably locked and these
actions are prohibited.
TIP
4 Enter the desired changes.
5 Select OK.
Arranging bookmarks and saved pages
Bookmarks View includes ten pages for
bookmarks so that you can arrange
bookmarks and saved pages in a logical
fashion. For example, you can store travel
links on one bookmark page, stock links on
another, and business links on a third page.
2 Select Edit Bookmarks from the
Bookmarks menu.
3 Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.
4 Use the stylus to drag and drop a
bookmark into the desired slot. You can
move a bookmark within the current
page or move it to a different bookmark
page by dragging and dropping it on the
Bookmark Page
icon.
5 Select OK.
1 From Bookmarks View, press
Menu
.
101
CHAPTER
5
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
Downloading files from a web page
The web browser lets you download files
that are recognized by one of the
applications on your smartphone. When
you download a file, you can open it in the
application that recognizes the file. For
example, download an MP3 file so you can
listen to it later in the Pocket Tunes™
application. If a file is not recognized by any
of the applications on your smartphone,
you can download the file to an expansion
card, but you cannot open it on your
smartphone.
You can download files such as new
applications, and choose to play or save
music and video files in many popular
formats—provided that the website
permits the downloading of files:
102
Item
Supported File Types
Pictures
JPEG, WBMP, GIF,
animated GIF
Videos
MP4, 3G2, ASF, WMV
Ringtones
MIDI, AAC
Music
MP3, WMA
You can also access software and other
downloads using the Downloads bookmark.
TIP
1 Go to the page with the link to the file
you want to download.
2 Press Left or Right to highlight
the link to the file, and then press
Center
.
3 If prompted, select what you want to do
with the file: Play, Save To Device, or
Save To Card.
4 Select Yes.
You can also save an image from a web
page by tapping and holding it with the stylus.
TIP
Streaming files from a web page
The web browser lets you stream files that
are recognized by one of the applications
on your smartphone. For example, you can
choose to play music and video files in
many popular formats (MP3, WMA, WMV).
1 When the web browser recognizes
streamed content on a web page, it
displays a Play
icon. To view or
listen to the streamed content, select
Play
.
Copying text from a web page
The web browser recognizes streamed
content that is not supported by any of the
applications on your smartphone, and it
displays a Media type not supported
message.
TIP
2 Once streaming begins, playback starts
automatically. Use the following
controls when viewing or listening:
•
Select
return to the web page
containing the streamed content.
•
Select
or press Center
pause playback.
to
•
Select
or press Center
to
resume playback after pausing.
•
A few seconds after playback begins,
the toolbar is hidden and you can view
the content on the full screen. Press
Up
or Down
to display the
toolbar; press Up
or Down
again to hide the toolbar again.
•
Press the Volume button on the side
of your smartphone to adjust the
volume.
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
You can copy text from a web page and
paste it into other applications.
1 Use the stylus to highlight the text you
want to copy.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Edit, and then select Copy.
4 Go to the app in which you want to
paste the text and use the stylus or
5-way
to position the cursor
where you want to paste the text.
5 Press Menu
.
6 Select Edit, and then select Paste.
If the web browser does not
recognize a phone number as dialable, you
can copy the phone number (as text) and
paste it into the Dial Pad (see Dialing from a
web page or message).
DID YOU KNOW?
Returning to recently viewed pages
The History list stores the addresses of the
last 100 pages you visited. Items in the
History list are sorted chronologically.
1 From Page View, press Menu
.
2 Select History from the Page menu.
103
CHAPTER
5
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
3 Press Down
list.
to navigate through the
4 Select the web page you want to load.
Finding text on a web page
1 From Page View, press Menu
.
2 Select Find Text on Page from the
Page menu.
3 Enter the text you want to find.
4 Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box
to indicate whether you want the search
to wrap from the end of the page to the
beginning when the end is reached.
5 Select Find to start the search.
Customizing your web browser settings
1 From Page View, press Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3 Select Page and set any of the following
preferences:
Start With: Determines which view
appears when you open the browser.
104
Home Page: Sets the page that appears
when you select
.
Restore Default: Selects the original
home page, if you changed it.
Show Address Bar: Sets whether the
web address appears in Page View.
When it is visible, you can select the
pick list to go to a previously viewed
page or enter a URL directly from Page
View.
4 Select General and set any of the
following preferences:
Normal mode/Fast mode: Determines
whether you want to hide selected
items so that web pages load faster.
When you select Fast mode, you can
set the following options:
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
Disable cascading style sheets:
Determines whether style sheets are
applied when you load a web page.
When style sheets are disabled, pages
download faster, but you may lose
some of the formatting.
Auto-complete: Determines whether
the web browser suggests text, based
on your previous entries, when you
begin entering info.
Disable cookies: Determines whether
websites can store personalized info on
your Treo smartphone. Some sites do
not work properly if you select this
option.
Disable JavaScript: Bypasses JavaScript
elements on the web pages you view.
Tap and Drag: Determines whether
dragging the stylus selects text or
scrolls through the content of the page.
KEY TERM Cascading style sheets A
method used to describe the presentation of
a web page or document written in a markup
language, such as HTML or XML.
Don’t download images! Determines
whether images appear when you load
a web page. If you select not to view
images, then web pages load faster. You
can still see any image by tapping and
holding the placeholder box on the web
page.
5 Select Advanced and set any of the
following preferences:
Set memory limit for storing pages:
Sets the memory available for your
105
CHAPTER
5
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
cache. Pages are cached so that they
load faster the next time you view
them.
6 Select OK.
Connections with
Bluetooth devices
Cookies: Indicates how much memory
is being used by cookies. To free up this
memory, select Clear Cookies.
Cache: Indicates how much memory is
being used by your cache to store
recent pages and history. To free up this
memory, select Clear Cache.
Clear cache on exit: Determines
whether the cache clears each time you
exit the web browser.
Set Proxy: Sets up a proxy server to
access the Internet. If your connection
requires a proxy server, please contact
your Internet service provider or IT
administrator for this information.
106
With your smartphone’s built-in Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can connect to a
number of Bluetooth devices, such as a
headset, car kit, printer, or GPS receiver, as
well as to other smartphones and
handhelds that are equipped with
Bluetooth wireless technology. If your
computer is enabled with Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can also
synchronize wirelessly or use your phone
as a wireless modem.
You can create a list of Bluetooth devices
that you trust to communicate with your
Treo smartphone. When communicating
with trusted devices, your Treo smartphone
skips the discovery process and creates a
secure link as long as the device is within
range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10
meters) depending on environmental
conditions, including obstacles, radio
interference from nearby electronic
equipment, and other factors.
When you configure a headset as
described in Connecting to a Bluetooth
hands-free device, the headset is
automatically added to your trusted device
list. Follow the steps in this section to add
other devices to your trusted device list,
such as a friend’s handheld.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to recreate any
partnerships you already created.
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
4 Select Setup Devices.
5 Select Trusted Devices.
Requesting a connection with another
Bluetooth device
1 Press Applications
Bluetooth
.
and select
2 Select Bluetooth On.
6 Select Add Device. The Discovery icon
appears, indicating that the discovery
process is active.
7 Select the Show pick list and select
Nearby devices.
3 (Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your smartphone when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
8 If the device you want to add doesn’t
appear on the discovery results list,
make sure that the other device is ready
to receive a connection request (see the
device’s documentation), and then
select Find More on your smartphone
to search again.
107
CHAPTER
5
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
9 Enter the same passkey on your
smartphone and on the Bluetooth
device, and select OK.
1 Press Applications
Bluetooth
.
and select
2 Select Bluetooth On.
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices
have a preset passkey; if so, you can find
the passkey in the documentation for that
device. Other devices provide a screen
where you enter a passkey that you make
up. In either case, you must use the same
passkey on both your smartphone and the
other Bluetooth device. We recommend
that where possible, you make up a
passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters
(letters and numerals only) to improve the
security of your smartphone. The longer
the passkey, the more difficult it is for the
passkey to be deciphered.
10 Select Done.
Accepting a connection from another
Bluetooth device
For the smartphone to be visible to
Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth setting must
be set to On and visibility must be set to
Visible or Temporary.
TIP
108
3 (Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your smartphone when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to recreate any
partnerships you already created.
4 Select the Visibility pick list and select
one of the following:
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that
are not on your Trusted Device list to
request a connection with your
smartphone. Your smartphone remains
accessible to other devices until you
turn this option off. After you’re done
using this setting, remember to change
it back to Hidden.
5 Enter the same passkey on your
smartphone and on the Bluetooth
device.
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices,
Use the Visible option only when you need
your smartphone to be accessible for an
extended period of time. For short term
accessibility, use the Temporary option.
TIP
Hidden: Allows only devices with which
such as headsets and GPS receivers, have
a preset passkey; if so, you can find the
passkey in the documentation for that
device. Other devices provide a screen
where you enter a passkey that you make
up. In either case, you must use the same
passkey on both your smartphone and the
other Bluetooth device. We recommend
that where possible, you make up a
passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters
(letters and numerals only) to improve the
security of your smartphone. The longer
the passkey, the more difficult it is for the
passkey to be deciphered.
you have previously formed a
partnership to request a connection
with your smartphone. New devices
cannot request a connection.
6 (Optional) Check the Add to trusted
device list box if you want to form a
partnership with the requesting device.
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices
that are not on your Trusted Device list
to request a connection with your
smartphone during the next two
minutes. Your smartphone reverts to
the Hidden setting and becomes
inaccessible to other devices after two
minutes.
7 Select OK.
109
CHAPTER
5
110
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
CHAPT ER
6
Your photos, videos, and
music
Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family, pets,
and your most recent vacation? Are you tired of carrying both your
MP3 player and your phone?
Your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone solves both problems. You
can keep your favorite photos right on your smartphone—videos,
too. And there's no need to carry an expensive MP3 player; you
can play music on your smartphone. Simply transfer songs onto
your smartphone or an expansion card and then listen through
your stereo headphones (cards and headphones sold separately).
Benefits
•
Never be far from your favorite
people, places, and songs
•
Arrange your photos, videos, and
songs
•
No separate photo viewer, MP3,
CD, or mini-disc player required
In this chapter
Camera and Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Pics & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Pocket Tunes™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Camera and
Camcorder
location is based on the location of the
album (smartphone or expansion card).
Your smartphone comes with an
easy-to-use, built-in, 1.3-megapixel camera
with 2x digital zoom. You can use the
camera to take and view pictures and
videos and send them to your friends and
family. To add a personal touch to your
smartphone, use your pictures as your
wallpaper in the Main View of the Phone
application, and as caller ID images.
Taking a picture
You can store pictures on your smartphone
or on an expansion card.
1 Press Applications
Camera
.
and select
2 By default, the Camera application
stores pictures you take in the PALM
folder on your smartphone. To store a
picture in a different location, select one
of the following:
: Stores the picture in
the selected album. The storage
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
New Albums: Opens a dialog box where
you can enter an album name and
select the storage location (smartphone
or expansion card).
The camera defaults to 1.3 megapixel
(1280 x 1024) resolution. The camera also
supports VGA (640 x 480) and QVGA (320 x
240) resolution. To view these settings before
you take a picture, press Menu.
TIP
3 Find your subject in the screen on your
smartphone. (The lens is on the back of
your smartphone.)
4 (Optional) To get a close-up of your
subject, press Up
to select 2x. Press
Down
to return to 1x.
113
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
5 Press Center
picture.
to capture the
6 Do any of the following:
To add an audio caption later, open the
picture and then select Audio Caption from
the Photo menu.
TIP
You can personalize a picture.
Open the Photo menu, select Draw on, and
then use the drawing tools to add your own
personal touch. When you save the picture,
you can replace the original or save a copy.
DID YOU KNOW?
Recording a video
You can store videos on your smartphone
or on an expansion card.
Saves the picture in the location
you selected in step 2.
Deletes the picture.
Opens a dialog box where you
can choose to attach the picture
to an email message or send it to
another Bluetooth device.
1 Press Applications
Camcorder
.
and select
The video recording screen displays the
approximate recording time you have left
based on the space available on your
smartphone or expansion card. Actual
recording time may vary depending on how
fast you are moving, how many colors you are
recording, and so on.
TIP
Lets you add a voice caption.
2 By default, the Camcorder application
stores videos you record in the PALM
folder on your smartphone. To store a
video in a different location, select one
of the following:
114
: Stores the video in the
selected album. The storage location is
based on the location of the album
(smartphone or expansion card).
New Albums: Opens a dialog box where
you can enter an album name and
select the storage location (smartphone
or expansion card).
5 After you finish recording, press
Center
again to stop.
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
6 Select any of the following:
Plays the video, so you can
review it.
Saves the video in the location
you selected in step 2.
Deletes the video.
The camcorder defaults to CIF (352 x 288)
resolution and also supports QCIF (176 x 144)
resolution. To view these settings before you
capture a video, press Menu.
TIP
3 Find your subject in the screen on your
smartphone. (The lens is on the back of
your smartphone.)
4 Press Center
to start recording.
Opens a dialog box where you
can choose to attach the video to
an email message or send it to
another Bluetooth device.
Opens a dialog box where you
can adjust the volume during
playback.
115
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
Microphone: (Videos only) Turns the
During playback, tap and drag the
progress indicator bar to jump to a different
section of the video. Select Pause to pause
video playback.
TIP
microphone on and off so that you can
record videos with or without sound.
Resolution: Sets the default size for
newly captured pictures or videos.
Customizing your Camera settings
You can customize the built-in camera’s
settings for your Treo 700P smartphone.
1 Go to Camera View or Camcorder View.
2 Press Menu
. If you are in Camera
View, the Photo Settings screen
appears. If you are in Camcorder View,
the Video Settings screen appears.
3 Set any of the following preferences:
Effects: Sets the color palette for the
current picture or video. You cannot
change an item’s palette after you take
the picture or video.
Prompt sound: (Pictures only) Sets the
sound that plays before you take
the picture.
Shutter sound: Determines whether a
sound plays when you take a picture or
video.
116
Date stamp: (Pictures only) Determines
whether the date the picture is taken
appears on your pictures.
Review photos/videos: Determines
whether you can review pictures or
videos before saving them and how
quickly they are automatically saved.
Auto naming: Assigns a name to a
series of pictures or videos to be
captured, such as Seattle001,
Seattle002, and so on.
1 Press Applications
Pics&Videos
.
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
and select
2 Select the album that contains the
picture you want to see.
To view an album from an expansion card,
insert the card and select the album from the
Album list. If the items on the card are not
grouped into albums, select the card name
from the list.
TIP
4 Select Done.
3 Select the picture you want to view.
Pics & Videos
Viewing a picture
In addition to viewing the pictures you
capture with the built-in camera, you can
view pictures captured on many popular
digital cameras or downloaded from the
Internet. Your smartphone supports the
following picture formats:
•
JPG
•
TIF
•
BMP
•
GIF
4 Press Right or Left to scroll to the
next item in the album.
To see the outer edges of a
picture that may not be visible, use the stylus
to tap and drag the picture in any direction.
DID YOU KNOW?
5 If the picture has a voice caption, select
to hear it.
6 Tap the picture or press Center
return to Thumbnail View.
to
In Thumbnail View, you can group photos
or videos to more easily locate them. Select
one of the grouping options from the View
menu.
TIP
117
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
Viewing a video
In addition to viewing the videos you
capture with the built-in camera, you can
view videos captured on many popular
digital cameras. Your smartphone supports
the following types of video files:
If you pause video playback
and then close the video, the video starts
where you left off the next time you play it.
DID YOU KNOW?
•
3GP
Viewing a slide show
•
3G2 (MPEG-4 video + QCELP audio +
.3g2 file type)
1 Press Applications
Pics&Videos
.
•
MP4
•
MPG
2 Highlight (or open) the album you want
to view.
•
M4V
•
ASF (with MPEG-4 video and
IMA-ADPCM audio)
•
AVI (with MJPEG video and PCM audio)
1 Press Applications
Pics&Videos
.
and select
2 Select the album that contains the video
you want to see.
3 Select the video you want to view.
Playback begins automatically.
4 Hold down Right or Left to seek
within the current video, or press Right
or Left to scroll to the next item in
the album.
118
5 Press Center
to return to
Thumbnail View.
and select
3 (Optional) Press Menu
, select
Options, and then select Auto-hide
Toolbar Off if you want to see the
toolbar.
4 Press Space
show.
5 Press Center
previous view.
to start the slide
to return to the
4 Select Share.
To set slide show options such as
background music and transitions, open the
Options menu and select Slideshow
Setting. Keep in mind that background music
overrides audio captions when you’re running
a slide show. Background music for a slide
show also overrides any music that might be
playing using the Pocket Tunes application on
your smartphone if you start a slide show.
TIP
Sending pictures or videos
You can attach pictures or videos to email
messages or send them to another
Bluetooth device.
5 Select the method you want to use to
send the pictures or videos.
6 (Optional) Enter any text you want to
add to the message.
1 From the Album list, select the album
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)
you want to send.
7 Address and send the message.
2 Tap
in the lower-right corner of the
screen.
You can copy pictures or videos into
another album. You can also copy pictures
and videos between your smartphone and
an expansion card.
3 Select the pictures or videos to send, or
select Select All to send the entire
album. (A + sign appears next to
selected items.)
DID YOU KNOW? You cannot send copyrighted
pictures or videos that appear with a Lock icon
in Thumbnail View or Picture list.
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
Copying a picture or video
1 From the Album list, select the album
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)
you want to copy.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Copy to from the Photo (or
Video) menu.
119
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
4 Select the pictures or videos to copy, or
select Select All to copy the entire
album. (A + sign appears next to
selected items.)
5 Select Copy.
6 Select the Copy items to pick list and
select whether you want to copy the
selected items to your device or to an
expansion card.
+ sign indicates
a picture is
selected
Organizing pictures and videos
1 Open the album you want to organize.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Album, and then select Add to
album or Remove from album.
4 Select the pictures or videos to add or
remove, or select Select All to add or
remove the entire album. (A + sign
indicates that you want to add the item.
An X sign indicates that you want to
remove the item.)
5 Select Add or Remove.
You can also open the Album
list from Camera View or Camcorder View by
selecting the icon in the lower-right corner.
DID YOU KNOW?
Install the Palm® Files application from the
Palm Software Installation CD to easily
browse and manage files on an expansion
card.
TIP
7 Select the Into album pick list and
select the album you want to copy the
selected items to.
To change the name, add a caption, or
view other picture or video information,
highlight (or open) the item, open the Photo
(or Video) menu, and select Details.
TIP
8 Select Copy.
You can also move pictures and videos
between albums. Open the Photo (or Video)
menu and select Move to. The remaining
steps are the same as copying pictures, but
use the Move commands instead of the Copy
commands.
TIP
120
Saving a picture as wallpaper
Deleting a picture or video
You can select a picture to use as wallpaper
for the Main View in the Phone application.
1 Open the album that contains the
picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.
1 Open the picture you want to save as
wallpaper.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select Save
as Wallpaper.
4 When the confirmation message
appears, confirm by selecting Yes, or
decline by selecting No.
2 Press Menu
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
.
3 Select Delete from the Photo (or
Video) menu.
4 Select the pictures or videos that you
want to delete, or select Select All to
delete the entire album. (An X sign
appears next to selected items.)
5 Select Delete.
6 Select Delete to confirm the deletion.
Adding a picture to a contact entry
1 Open the picture you want to add to a
contact.
2 Press Menu
You can also highlight a picture or video in
Thumbnail View, and then press Backspace
to delete the highlighted item.
TIP
.
3 Select Options, and then select Save
as Contact.
Viewing pictures and videos on your
computer
4 Select the contact you want to add this
picture to.
When you synchronize your Treo 700P
smartphone, your pictures and videos are
copied to your desktop computer. You can
view pictures in JPEG format and videos in
MPEG-4 format (3G2 file extension). You
can email them to friends using your
desktop email application.
Rotating a picture
1 Open the picture you want to rotate.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Rotate from the Photo menu.
4 Select the orientation.
121
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
You can view and edit synchronized
pictures and videos in the Palm Media
desktop application. Open Palm® Desktop
software and click the Media icon. You can
refer to the Palm Desktop Online Help for
information about using the Palm Media
desktop application.
If you want to manage photos and videos
directly from the location in which they're
stored, you can find your pictures and
videos in the following locations:
Windows:
•
My Documents\ My Photos\Palm
Photos\ \Internal
•
My Documents\ My Photos\Palm
Photos\ \Expansion Card
•
My Documents\ My Videos\Palm
Videos\ \Internal
•
My Documents\ My Videos\Palm
Videos\\Expansion Card
Mac:
•
122
Mac HD : Users : :
Pictures : Palm Photos : : Internal
•
Mac HD : Users : :
Pictures : Palm Photos : : Expansion Card
•
Mac HD : Users : :
Movies : Palm Videos : : Internal
•
Mac HD : Users : :
Movies : Palm Videos : : Expansion Card
Pocket Tunes™
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Mac
You need an
expansion card (sold separately) to listen to
music on your smartphone. You cannot
transfer MP3 files from your Mac directly
onto your smartphone.
You can listen to music through the
speaker on the back of your smartphone or
through the stereo headset included with
your smartphone. (If you want to use
stereo headphones with a 3.5mm
connector, then a 2.5mm stereo adapter is
required, sold separately).To listen to music
on your smartphone, you need to convert
the music files into MP3 format using
Windows Media Player (Windows
computers) or iTunes (Mac computers),
and then transfer the music files to your
smartphone or an expansion card. After
you transfer the music files, you can play
them using the Pocket Tunes™ application
on your smartphone.
You can upgrade Pocket Tunes to a version
that supports more music file formats (such
as WMA); supports subscription music; and
includes additional features. For more info,
visit www.pocket-tunes.com/palm.
TIP
3 On your computer, open Windows
Media Player, and then click the
full-screen icon in the upper-right corner
to maximize the window.
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
4 Click Tools, and then click Options.
5 Click the Rip Music tab, click the
Format pick list, and then select mp3.
Click OK.
6 Click Tools, and then click Options.
7 Click the Devices tab, select Palm
Handheld from the Devices list, and
then click Properties.
DID YOU KNOW? If a call comes in when you’re
listening to music, you can take the call and
the music pauses automatically. After you
finish the call, the music starts again.
Setting up Windows Media Player for
MP3
On a Windows computer, you need to set
Windows Media Player to save your music
files in MP3 format in order for the files to
be compatible with Pocket Tunes.
1 Connect your smartphone to your
computer with the sync cable.
2 Press Applications
pTunes
.
and select
Select your
smartphone
Click
Properties
8 Click the Quality tab, uncheck the
Convert files as required by this
handheld (recommended) box. Click
Apply.
123
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
CHAPTER
6
4 Click the Import Using pop-up menu
and select MP3 Encoder.
Uncheck
box
5 (Optional) Click the Setting pop-up
menu and select Good Quality.
TIP Mac If you want greater control over the
file size and sound quality of your MP3 files,
select Custom from the Setting pop-up
menu.
Transferring MP3 files from your computer
9 Click OK, and then click OK again.
You now have set up Windows Media
Player to transfer MP3 files to the Pocket
Tunes application on your smartphone.
Setting up iTunes for MP3
On a Mac, use iTunes (included with OS X)
to convert music from a CD to MP3 format.
For more information on using the iTunes
software, see the documentation that
came with your Mac.
1 On your Mac, open iTunes.
2 Select Preferences.
3 Click the Advanced button at the top of
the window, and then click Importing.
124
The Pocket Tunes software that comes
with your smartphone is compatible with
the popular MP3 audio file format. If your
MP3 files are already on your computer’s
hard drive, you need to transfer them to
your smartphone to listen to them on your
smartphone.
If an expansion card is inserted into the
smartphone, Windows Media Player
copies the MP3 files to the expansion card.
If you don’t have an expansion card
inserted, the MP3 files are copied to your
smartphone’s memory.
IMPORTANT You must synchronize your
smartphone with your computer at least
once before you can transfer MP3 files
from your computer.
1 Connect your smartphone to your
computer with the USB sync cable.
2 On your smartphone, press
Applications
and select
pTunes
.
3 If you are transferring MP3 files from a
Mac, insert an expansion card into your
smartphone. This step is optional for
Windows users.
4 Do one of the following:
file name, and the destination (card). Click
OK. Synchronize your smartphone with
your computer. Be patient; transferring
music to an expansion card can take
several minutes.
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
DID YOU KNOW? You can also use a card reader
accessory (sold separately) to transfer MP3
files from your computer to your expansion
card. Create a Music_Audio folder in the root
directory of the card, and store your MP3 files
in this folder.
Transferring music from a CD to your
smartphone
WINDOWS ONLY Open Windows Media
Player on your computer. Select the Sync
tab, and then select Palm Handheld from
the drop-down list. Select Start Sync. The
files are transferred to your smartphone.
NOTE Do not press the sync button on
your cable. Windows Media Player
transfers the files, so there’s no need to do
anything.
MAC ONLY Drag and drop the MP3 files
onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the
Palm folder. Select your device name, the
If your songs are on a CD and you want to
listen to them on your smartphone, you
need to convert them to MP3 format on
your computer before you transfer the files
to your smartphone.
WINDOWS ONLY
1 On your computer, open Windows
Media Player.
2 Insert the music CD into your
computer’s CD drive.
3 Select the Rip tab.
125
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
4 Select the tracks you want to convert to
MP3.
5 Select Rip Music.
6 Transfer the MP3 files to your
smartphone as described in Transferring
MP3 files from your computer.
1 Make sure the Ringer switch is set to
the Sound On position. See Silencing
sounds for more information.
2 Press Applications
pTunes
.
and select
You can change the settings on your
smartphone so that pressing and holding the
Side button opens Pocket Tunes. See
Reassigning buttons for details.
TIP
MAC ONLY
1 On your Mac, open iTunes.
2 Insert the music CD into the CD drive
on your Mac.
3 Do any of the following:
3 Check the boxes next to the tracks you
want to convert to MP3.
•
To play or resume playback of the
current song, select Play
.
4 Click the Import button in the
upper-right corner of the iTunes window.
•
To play the next song, select Next
Song .
•
To play the previous song, select
Previous Song .
•
To play a different song, select
Choose Song
and select a
song from the list.
•
To adjust the volume during playback,
press the Volume button on the side
of your smartphone.
•
To pause playback select Pause
5 When the songs are finished importing,
click the Eject Disk button in the
lower-right corner of the iTunes window.
6 Transfer the MP3 files to your
smartphone as described in Transferring
MP3 files from your computer.
Listening to music on your Treo
smartphone
CAUTION Protect your hearing. Listening
to this device at full volume for a long
period of time can damage your hearing.
126
.
You can also press Space to
pause and resume playback, as well as use
the 5-way to navigate among songs or pause
and resume playback.
DID YOU KNOW?
1 Press Applications
pTunes
.
2 Press Menu
and select
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
.
3 Select Actions, and then select
Manage Playlists.
4 Select New, and then enter a name for
the playlist.
Progress
indicator
5 Select Add Song. Select the songs you
want to include on the playlist.
Play/Pause
Choose
Song
Previous
song
Next song
Volume
Pocket Tunes continues playing until it
reaches the end of your list or until you
select Pause
. Music continues to play
even if you switch to another application or
turn off your screen. If you want to stop
playing music when you exit Pocket Tunes,
open the Background Prefs menu and
uncheck the Enable background play box,
and then select OK.
6 Select Save List.
To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket
Tunes, select Choose Songs, and then select
Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play,
and then select All.
TIP
Creating a playlist
If you want to play a group of songs in a
particular order, you can create a playlist.
127
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
Editing a playlist
1 Press Applications
pTunes
.
2 Press Menu
•
To add a song, select Add Song,
check a song’s box, and then
select Done.
•
To move a song up or down one slot,
select a song and then select Up or
Down.
and select
.
3 Select Actions, and then select
Manage Playlists.
4 Highlight a playlist, and then select Edit.
5 Do any of the following:
•
128
To delete a song from the playlist,
select the song and then select
Remove.
6 Select Save List.
To delete a playlist, select Manage
Playlists from the Actions menu, select the
playlist, and then select Delete List. Select
Yes to confirm the deletion.
TIP
CHAPT ER
7
Your personal information
organizer
Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those
scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone is all
you need to organize your personal information and keep it with
you wherever you go.
You never lose your information, even if your battery is
completely drained. All of your personal info is backed up each
time you synchronize, and your info is kept private when you
use the security features on your smartphone. Also, you can
easily share info with others electronically.
Benefits
•
Track current, future, and past
appointments
•
Make to-do lists that get done
•
Set reminders for appointments,
birthdays, important tasks, and
more
•
Before you call your friend in
London, check the time first
In this chapter
Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Contacts
2 Select the Contacts favorite button.
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
You can also open Contacts from
Applications View. Press Applications and
select Contacts.
TIP
Contacts is where you enter information
about people you know. You can access
this info from the Phone application to dial
phone numbers and create favorites, and
from the Messaging and email applications
to send messages. When you create a
contact, you can also assign a photo and
ringtone ID to that contact, so you know
when they call you.
3 Select New Contact.
4 Use the 5-way
to move between
fields as you enter information.
DID YOU KNOW? If your company uses
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be
able to sync Contacts directly with the server.
See Working with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync for info.
5 (Optional) Do any of the following:
Adding a contact
If you have several contacts to enter, it’s
more efficient to use Palm® Desktop software
or Microsoft Outlook on your computer and
then sync your smartphone with your
computer. For more info see Synchronizing
information—the basics.
TIP
1 Press Phone
Add a caller ID photo: Select the Picture
box, and then do one of the following:
•
Select Camera to take a picture and
add it to this contact when you
save the picture.
•
Select Photos to add an existing
picture to this contact.
.
131
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the
Ringtone pick list and select a ringtone
from the list to give incoming calls from
this contact a distinctive ring.
Place the entry in a category or mark it
private: Select Details. (See Working
Display additional fields for this
contact: Select Plus
.
6 After you enter all the information,
select Done.
Last name (SMI for Smith)
•
First initial and last name (JSM for
John Smith)
2 Select the name of the entry you want
to open.
3 Select Edit.
with private entries for more info.)
Add a note to an entry: Select Note
•
.
4 Make changes to the entry as
necessary, and then select Done.
In the Contacts list, press Up or Down on
the 5-way to move to the previous or next
Contacts record.
TIP
Deleting a contact
You can assign a ringtone to an entire
category of contacts. For example, use a
special ringtone for categories such as Family,
Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category
pick list in the upper-right corner, select Edit
Categories, and then select the category.
Select the ringtone on the Edit Category
screen.
TIP
Viewing or changing contact information
1 In the Contacts list, begin entering one
of the following for the contact you
want to view or edit:
•
132
First name (JOH for John)
1 Open the contact you want to delete.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Delete Contact from the Record
menu, and then select OK.
Defining your business card
1 Create a new contact and enter your
own business card info.
2 Open the contact entry containing your
business card info.
3 Press Menu
.
4 Select Business Card from the Record
menu.
After you define your business card, you
can beam it to other Palm OS® devices. In any
Phone view or the Contacts application, open
the Record menu and select Beam Business
Card.
TIP
Calendar
Displaying your calendar
•
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
Press Calendar
repeatedly to cycle
through the various views:
Agenda View: Shows your daily
schedule, the number of unread email
messages, and any items on your Tasks
list that are overdue or due today. If
there’s room, Agenda View also lists
events on future dates.
Day View: Shows your daily schedule
one day at a time.
Calendar is a powerful organizer application
that helps you manage your schedule. You
can view your calendar by day, week, or
month, or as an agenda list that combines
your Tasks list and email notifications with
your appointments. Schedule repeating
meetings or block out a vacation by
creating one event set to repeat at an
interval you specify. Color-code your
appointments by category and add notes
with helpful information.
DID YOU KNOW? If your company uses
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be
able to synchronize Calendar events directly
with the server. See Working with Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync for information.
Week View: Shows your schedule for an
entire week. The time frames are
based on the Start Time and End Time
settings in Calendar Preferences.
Month View: Shows your schedule for a
whole month.
133
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
•
From any Calendar view, open the
Options menu and select Year View to
view a calendar for an entire year.
•
From any Calendar view (except Agenda
View), use the 5-way
to go to
another day, week, month, or year
(based on the current view).
•
1 Press Calendar
appears.
2 Press Left or Right
desired day.
Selected
date
From any Calendar view (except Agenda
View), select Go To, and then select a
date from the calendar.
You can customize your smartphone to
display the most current Calendar event in the
Main View in the Phone application. Press
Phone, open the Options menu, and then
select Phone Display Options. Check the
Show Calendar event box.
TIP
Creating an event
If you have several appointments to enter,
it’s more efficient to use Palm Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook on your
computer and then synchronize your
smartphone with your computer. For more
information, see Synchronizing information—
the basics.
TIP
until Day View
to select the
Selected
day
3 Select New.
4 Using the keyboard, enter a starting
hour and minute for the event, such as
545 for 5:45.
5 Select the End Time box and enter the
ending hour and minute for the event.
6 (Optional) To assign a time zone to the
event, select the Time Zone pick list
and select a city in the time zone you
want.
7 Select OK.
8 Enter a description for the event.
IMPORTANT If you use Palm Desktop
software, do not add time zones to your
134
events. Palm Desktop does not support
time zones.
If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use
the time zone feature, but you must install
the conduit that came with your Treo 700P
smartphone (or a subsequent update) on all
the computers with which you sync your
smartphone. Chapura PocketMirror and
other earlier Microsoft Outlook conduits do
not support time zones.
To automatically assign a time zone to
your events, open the Options menu, select
Preferences, and check the New events use
time zones box. All your new events will be
assigned to your local time zone (existing
events aren’t affected), and you can change
the time zone setting for individual events.
TIP
If you want your events with time zones to
stay at the same time in Calendar, regardless
of the time zone you are in, uncheck the Get
time zone from mobile network box on the
Date & Time Preferences screen. If the box is
checked, the event time shifts if you travel to
a different time zone. See Setting the date
and time for information.
Adding an alarm to an event
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
1 In Calendar, select the event.
2 Select Details.
3 Check the Alarm box and select the
number of minutes, hours, or days
before the event that you would like to
receive the alarm.
The alarm for untimed events is defined by
minutes, days, or hours before midnight of
the date of the event.
TIP
4 Select OK.
Type of time
units
TIP
Number of
time units
When an alarm occurs, the
Alert screen displays all your pending alerts.
Select an alert description to jump to that
item, or check the box to clear that alert.
DID YOU KNOW?
135
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
Scheduling a repeating event
Creating an untimed event
An untimed event, such as a holiday or
deadline, does not occur at a particular
time.
TIP
1 Press Calendar
View.
TIP
until you are in Day
2 Press Left or Right
date of the event.
to go to the
To enter a birthday or anniversary, add this
info to the person’s Contacts entry and it
automatically appears in your Calendar.
To enter a holiday, create an untimed
event. Then, from the Details screen, select
Every year as the repeat interval.
3 Make sure no times are highlighted.
1 Create an event, and then select it.
4 Enter a description for the event.
A diamond appears next to the
description of an untimed event.
2 Select Details.
3 Select the Repeat pick list, and then
select a repeat interval. If the interval
you need doesn’t appear on the list,
select Other to define a custom
interval.
4 Select OK.
136
4 Do one of the following:
This icon
indicates a
repeating
event.
•
To create a new category, select New
and then enter a category name.
•
To add a color to an existing category,
select a category and select Edit.
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
5 Select the color you want to give this
category, and then select OK.
6 (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add
or edit more categories.
DID YOU KNOW? If you sync with Microsoft
Outlook and your events include other people,
a With field appears in the Details dialog box
and your attendee info appears in this field
after you sync.
7 Select OK two more times.
Now that the categories are set up with
colors, you can assign categories to your
events to color-code them. See the next
section for details.
Color-coding your schedule
Use color-coding to quickly spot various
types of events. For example, make
appointments with family green,
coworkers blue, and friends red. Follow
these steps to create a category and
assign it a color-code.
1 From Day View, select an event
description or select an empty timeslot.
2 Select Details.
3 Select the Category pick list and select
Edit Categories.
Editing or deleting an event
1 Select the event you want to edit or
delete.
2 Select Details.
3 In addition to the settings covered
earlier in this chapter, you can also
change any of the following settings:
Date and Time: Displays when the event
takes place. Change these settings to
reschedule the event.
137
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
Location: Provides a description of
where the event takes place.
Category: Sets the color-coded category
for this event.
: Provides space for you to
enter additional text.
Note
Delete: Removes the event from your
calendar.
4 Select OK.
To save memory, you can purge your old
events. Open the Record menu and select
Purge. Select the Delete events older than
pick list and select a time frame. Select OK.
TIP
Show Due Tasks: The tasks that are due
today and the tasks that are overdue
appear in Agenda View.
Show Messages: The number of read
and unread email messages displays in
Agenda View.
Background: A favorite photo becomes
Customizing display options for your
calendar
1 Press Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select
Display Options.
3 Select the Default View pick list and
select the view you want to see when
you open Calendar.
4 Select Agenda and set any of the
following options:
138
the Agenda View background. Check
the Background box, select the image
placeholder, and then select a photo.
Adjust the fade setting so that the text
is easy to read against the photo.
5 Select Day and set any of the following
Day View options:
indicate under which category the event
is filed.
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
6 Select Month and set any of the
following Month View options:
Show Category List: The Category pick
list appears in Day View.
Show Time Bars: The time bars appear
in Day View to show the duration of an
event and to illustrate event conflicts.
Compress Day View: When this box is
unchecked, all time slots appear on the
screen. When this box is checked, start
and end times appear for each event,
but blank time slots near the bottom of
the screen disappear to minimize
scrolling.
Show Category Column: The
color-coded category marker appears
between the time and the description to
Show Category List: The Category pick
list appears in Month View.
Timed Events: The events that are
scheduled for a specific time appear in
Month View.
Untimed Events: The events that are
scheduled for a specific date but not a
specific time appear in Month View.
Daily Repeating Events: The events that
repeat every day appear in Month View.
7 Select OK.
139
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
Selecting alarm tones
1 Press Menu
Reminder Sound: The tone played if an
alarm is not acknowledged and
the alarm repeats itself.
.
2 Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
Repeat: The number of times the alarm
3 Select the Application pick list and
select Calendar.
repeats itself if the alarm is not
acknowledged.
4 Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
Default Alarm: The default timeframe
for the alarm field.
5 Select the Vibrate pick list and select an
option for how you want your
smartphone to vibrate for an event
alarm.
6 Select tones from any of the following
pick lists:
7 Select Done.
You can also record sounds and use them
as alarms. Select Manage on the Sound &
Alerts Preferences screen.
TIP
To record a sound, select New.
To play a sound, select it and press Center
on the 5-way.
• To delete a sound, select it and press
Backspace.
• To send a sound, select it and then select
Send.
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a
silent alarm that can vibrate even when the
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off.
•
•
Alarm Sound: The tone played the first
time your alarm goes off.
140
World Clock
World Clock displays the day and time in
three cities anywhere around the globe.
Whether you’re traveling or staying home,
it’s easy to keep track of the best time to
reach your business associates, friends,
and family in faraway places.
one of these two cities, so that you always
know what time it is at home.
1 Press Applications
World Clock
.
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
and select
2 Select a City pick list, and select a city
in the same time zone as the city you
want to track.
If you did not select the option to get the
date and time from the mobile network, then
you can set the city at the top of the screen to
a fixed location.
TIP
Selecting cities
World Clock shows the system date and
time above the world map. If you selected
the option to get the date and time from
the mobile network (see Setting the date
and time), the your wireless service
provider network automatically updates the
time display to match the local time when
you travel.
Below the world map you can view the
time in two other cities. If you travel a lot
you may want to select your home city as
You can run your stylus over
the map to see the time in other cities. The
shadow over the map represents nighttime
moving across the globe.
DID YOU KNOW?
World Clock does not automatically update
the system time for daylight savings time. To
change the Daylight Savings Time setting, see
Setting the date and time.
TIP
141
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
Adding cities
1 Select Off in the upper-right corner.
If the city you want to display is not in the
predefined list, you can add it.
2 Select the time you want the alarm to
sound.
1 Select a City pick list and select Edit
List.
3 Select OK.
2 Select Add.
3 Select a location in the same time zone
as the city you want to add, and then
select OK.
To customize the alarm sound and
volume, open the Options menu and select
Alarm Preferences.
TIP
Make sure the Ringer switch is set to
Sound On, so that you can hear the alarm.
TIP
4 Enter the name of the city.
5 Select Location, select Map, select the
location of the city, and then select OK.
Tasks
6 If the city does not observe Daylight
Savings Time, uncheck this box. If
Daylight Savings Time is observed,
enter Start and End dates.
You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks
you need to complete and to keep a record
of when you finish tasks.
7 Select OK.
Adding a task
Setting an alarm
The next time you travel, don’t rely on a
hotel alarm clock to get you to that
important meeting. Use your smartphone
instead. World Clock includes a built-in
alarm feature that you can use as a travel
alarm.
142
1 Press Applications
Tasks
.
and select
2 Select New to create a new task.
You can also select the priority from the
Tasks list by selecting the number next to a
task and then selecting a priority level.
TIP
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
3 Enter a description of the task. The text
can be longer than one line.
Setting task priority, due date, and other
details
The Details dialog box enables you to
assign a priority level, due date, category,
privacy flag, and other details for each task.
1 Select the task to which you want to
assign details.
2 Select Details.
3 Set any of the following:
Priority: Select the priority number for
this task (1 is most important). Later
you can arrange your tasks based on the
importance of each task.
Category: Assign the task to a specific
category.
Due Date: Select the Due Date pick list
and select a due date for the task.
If you turn on the Show Due Dates option
in the Tasks Preferences screen, you can
change the due date later by selecting the
task’s due date in the Tasks list.
TIP
Alarm: Set an alarm for this task.
Repeat: Indicate whether the task
occurs at regular intervals and how
often it repeats. When you check off a
repeating task, the next instance of this
143
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
task automatically appears in your task
list.
If you accidentally check off a task and
need to uncheck it, highlight the task again
and press Center on the 5-way to uncheck it.
TIP
Private: Check this box to mark this task
private. See Working with private
entries for additional information.
You can set Tasks to record the date that
you completed a task, and you can select to
show or hide completed tasks. Completed
tasks remain in the memory of your
smartphone until you purge them.
TIP
: Select this button to enter
additional text that you want to
associate with the task.
Overdue tasks have an
exclamation point (!) next to the due date.
DID YOU KNOW?
4 Select OK.
Press Menu to access other features such
as importing phone numbers into the Tasks
list.
TIP
Checking off a task
Organizing your tasks
In the Tasks list, select one of these
options:
•
All: Displays all your tasks.
•
Date: Displays tasks that are due in a
specific time frame. Select the Date
pick list (in the title bar) to select Due
1 Select the task you want to check off.
2 Press Center
or tap in the box to
check off the task.
144
Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7 Days, or
Past Due.
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
Deleting a task
1 Select the task you want to delete.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Delete Task from the Record
menu.
4 Select OK.
To save memory, you can purge all
completed tasks. Open the Record menu and
select Purge. Select OK.
TIP
•
Category: Displays tasks that are
assigned to the selected category.
Select the Category pick list to select a
different category.
Customizing Tasks
Tasks Preferences enable you to control
the appearance of the Tasks list.
1 In the Tasks list, press Menu
.
145
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
2 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3 Set any of the following preferences:
Sort by: Indicates the order in which
your tasks appear in the list.
Show Completed Tasks: Displays tasks
you’ve checked off.
Show Priorities: Displays the priority
setting for each task.
Show Categories: Displays the category
for each task.
Alarm Sound: Sets the sound for the
alarms you assign to your tasks.
4 Select OK.
Record Completion Date: Replaces due
date with the completion date when
you complete (check off) the task.
Show Due Dates: Displays task due
dates and inserts an exclamation point
(!) next to overdue tasks.
146
You can display your tasks in
your calendar. See Customizing display
options for your calendar for details.
DID YOU KNOW?
CHAPT ER
8
Your memos and documents
With its ability to store large amounts of important information,
your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone lets you take your office
with you—including your Microsoft Office and PDF files. You
can keep updated copies of the files on both your smartphone
and your computer so that you can work on them in the most
convenient location any time.
Leave your note pad and voice recorder at home. Use Memos
to type notes. Use Voice Memo to record notes, agenda items,
and other important thoughts, and play them back, right on
your smartphone. You can even send your notes and voice
memos to a friend or colleague by attaching them to an email
message.
Benefits
•
Manage Word, Excel, PowerPoint,
and PDF files on your smartphone
•
Improve productivity by taking
important docs, spreadsheets, and
presentations with you
•
Capture thoughts on the fly
In this chapter
Documents To Go® Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Documents To Go
Professional
®
NOTE The Palm Software Installation CD
includes the Documents To Go® desktop
software. On your smartphone, the
companion application for Documents To
Go is named Documents.
With the Documents application, you can
take your important office info with you.
You can carry, create, view, and edit
Microsoft Word and Excel files directly on
your smartphone. You can also view, carry,
and manage PowerPoint and PDF files. For
example, you can open email attachments,
files you download with the web browser,
and files stored on an expansion card—as
long as the files are in a supported format.
If you install the Documents To Go desktop
software (from the Palm Software
Installation CD), you can use Documents
To Go to transfer files to your smartphone
when you synchronize.
Here are a few more examples of what you
can do with Documents:
•
Send and receive email attachments in
Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat
file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
•
View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and
Acrobat files (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
•
Create or edit a Word-compatible
document or Excel-compatible
spreadsheet on your smartphone, and
then save it in the native DOC or XLS
format.
•
Create a PowerPoint presentation on
your computer, use the Documents To
Go desktop application to optimize the
file for your smartphone, and then sync
the file onto your smartphone. View or
edit the file on your smartphone, and
then sync again to transfer the changes
to the original PowerPoint file on your
computer.
8
CHAPTER
YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS
NOTE The Documents application does
not support some editing functions, such
as multiple font sizes and spell checking.
149
CHAPTER
8
YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS
For more info on the Documents To Go
desktop application, click the Documents To
Go icon on your computer, and then click
Help, or go to www.dataviz.com.
TIP
Install the Files application from the Palm
Software Installation CD to easily browse and
manage files on an expansion card.
TIP
When you work on a file on your
smartphone, you can save it to your
smartphone or an expansion card. Open the
File menu, select Save As, and then select
the location where you want to save the file.
TIP
Memos
Opening a document
In the Documents application, you can
view and open any Word, Excel,
PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your
smartphone or an expansion card that is
inserted in the expansion slot.
1 Press Applications
Documents
.
Memos are a great way to store notes on
your Treo 700P smartphone.
Each memo can include 4,096
characters of text.
DID YOU KNOW?
and select
Creating a memo
1 Press Applications
Memos
.
and select
2 Enter the text you want to appear in the
memo.
3 Select Done.
2 Select the document you want from the
list.
150
important thoughts directly on your
smartphone.
8
CHAPTER
YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS
Creating a voice memo
When recording a voice memo, face your
smartphone’s screen while speaking.
You can assign categories to your memos.
Open the memo you want to change, select
the category pick list at the top of the screen,
and select a category.
TIP
Deleting a memo
The memo is automatically saved to
your smartphone.
2 (Optional) Enter a title for the memo.
You can also access Voice Memo by
pressing Applications and selecting Voice
Memo.
TIP
1 Open the memo you want to delete.
2 Press Menu
1 Press and hold the Side button on your
smartphone while recording your
memo. After you finish recording,
release the Side button.
.
3 Select Delete Memo from the Record
menu.
4 Select OK.
Voice Memo
Voice Memo provides a place for you to
record and play back notes and other
If you need to pause while recording,
press and hold Center on the 5-way. Release
the button to resume recording.
TIP
Your recording pauses
automatically when you receive a call. If you
ignore the call, you can press Center on the
5-way to resume recording. If you answer the
call, recording stops and saves; you cannot
resume a previous recording; you must start
another voice memo.
DID YOU KNOW?
151
CHAPTER
8
YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS
Listening to a voice memo
1 Press Applications
Voice Memo
.
and select
2 In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the
voice memo title and then press
Center
to select it. The voice
memo begins to play.
3 Press Center
playback.
152
to pause or stop
To adjust the volume level, press the
Volume button on the side of your
smartphone.
TIP
To change a voice memo title, open the
Voice Memo menu and select Rename
Memo.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? You can send a voice memo in
an email (see the documentation for your
email application). You can also use Bluetooth
wireless technology to send a voice memo to
a nearby Bluetooth device (see Sending info
over a Bluetooth wireless connection).
CHAPT ER
9
Your application and
info management tools
Synchronization is a great way to transfer, update, and back up
info on your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone. Synchronizing
simply means that info you entered or updated in one place
(your smartphone or your computer) is automatically updated in
the other. There’s no need to enter info twice.
Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and
limitless storage solution. When one card becomes full, simply
use another card to carry your extra music and video clips and
to install and run cool games and other software, from
dictionaries to travel guides.
Benefits
•
Locate info in your applications
with the Find feature
•
Install applications, games, and
other software
•
Quickly enter, update, and protect
your info on your computer and
your smartphone
•
Store, carry, and exchange info
In this chapter
Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Sending information with Bluetooth® wireless technology . . . . . . . 162
Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
Using Find
The Find feature locates any text in the
built-in applications and databases and
in some third-party applications. The Find
feature searches for the group of
characters you specify, including characters
that are part of a word. Find is not case
sensitive.
DID YOU KNOW? Find locates any word that
begins with the text you enter. For example,
entering “plan” finds “planet,” but not
“airplane.”
1 Press Option , and then press Shift/
Find
to open the Find dialog box.
2 Enter the text you want to find.
3 Select OK to start the search.
4 In the search results, select the text you
want to review, or select Find More to
continue the search.
Viewing and using
the alerts
The Alert screen on your smartphone
shows info about incoming items such as
new email messages and Calendar events.
The Alert screen also notifies you if you
miss a phone call.
To view the Alert screen, tap the blinking
bell
when it appears in the upper-left
corner of any screen, or press and hold
Center
when the blinking bell appears.
You can do any of the following:
•
Check the box to clear an alert from the
list.
155
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
•
Select the alert to open the
corresponding application and view the
alert item (message, event, missed call,
and so on).
•
Select Done to close the Alert screen
and return to whatever you were doing
on your smartphone before you opened
the Alert screen. The bell continues to
blink in the upper-left corner of the
screen.
•
Select Clear All to delete all alerts on
the Alert screen.
Calculator
Calculator includes a basic calculator, plus
an advanced calculator with scientific,
financial, and conversion functions.
Switching between Basic and Advanced
Calculator Modes
1 Press Applications
Calc
.
2 Press Menu
and select
.
3 Select Options, and then select
Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.
156
In Basic Mode, you can also press Right
on the 5-way to switch to Advanced Mode.
In Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way
to cycle between functions, and press Left on
the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.
TIP
You can tap the onscreen
number pad or use the keyboard to input
numbers.
DID YOU KNOW?
Selecting functions in Advanced
Calculator Mode
Area: Area conversions for metric,
1 Switch to Advanced Mode (see the
preceding procedure).
Volume: Volume conversions for metric
and English values.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select the
type of function you want to use:
Math: Advanced mathematical
functions such as exponents, roots, and
logarithms.
Trig: Trigonometric functions such as
sine, cosine, tangent, and variants.
traditional, and English values.
4 Press Menu
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
.
5 Select Pref, and then select the decimal
display format: Float, Fixed(x), Sci(x),
or Eng(x).
6 Press Menu
.
7 Select Pref, and then select the number
display format: Degrees, Radians, or
Grads.
Finance: Financial calculator functions
such as APR and amortization.
Logic: Hexadecimal characters in
keypad, plus logic functions such as
And, Not, Or, and Xor.
Statistics: Statistical functions such as
sum, factorial, and random number
generator.
Weight/Tmp: Weight and temperature
conversions for metric and English
values.
Length: Length conversions for metric
and English values.
Select Sto to store a number in one of ten
memory slots. Select Rcl to recall a stored
number.
TIP
Select Con to access a list of
mathematical constants such as Avogadro’s
number or the speed of light.
TIP
Installing applications
Your smartphone comes with several
built-in and ready-to-use applications. You
can also install additional applications, such
as business software, games, and more.
157
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
The Palm Software Installation CD includes
several bonus software apps and you can
purchase other third-party Palm OS® apps
as well. To learn about applications you can
add to your smartphone, go to
www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo.
NOTE The instructions in this section tell
you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS
application) and PDB (Palm OS database)
files on your Treo smartphone. Some Palm
OS software uses an installer or wizard to
guide you through the process. For details,
consult the documentation that came with
the software.
Installing bonus software from the CD
The Palm Software Installation CD includes
several bonus software applications that
you can install on your smartphone. You
can install these applications when you
install the desktop software, or you can
install them later.
1 Insert the Palm Software Installation CD
into the CD drive on your computer.
2 Click Install bonus software.
3 Click the name of the application you
want to install.
158
4 Click Install (on the right side of the
screen).
5 (Optional) Repeat steps 3 and 4 to
install additional applications.
6 Synchronize your smartphone with your
computer to install the application(s) on
your Treo smartphone.
Installing applications from the Internet
You can use the web browser on your
smartphone to install Palm OS files (PRC or
PDB) directly from the Internet. When you
download a PRC or PDB file, it is
automatically installed on your
smartphone. If a file is compressed (ZIP or
SIT files), you need to download it to your
computer and expand the file before
installing it on your smartphone.
1 Open the web browser (see Viewing a
web page).
2 Go to the page that contains the link to
the application you want to download.
3 Press Left or Right to highlight
the link to the file, and then press
Center
to initiate the download
process.
4 Follow the onscreen instructions to
accept and install the application.
2 Select your device name from the User
list, and then click OK.
Installing applications from a computer
3 Synchronize your smartphone with your
computer to install the application(s) on
your Treo smartphone.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an app
from your computer to your Treo
smartphone, you must first install
Palm Desktop software on your computer
(see Installing the desktop synchronization
software).
When you download an application to your
computer, it is probably in a compressed
format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is
compressed, you need to use a
decompression utility on your computer,
such as WinZip or Allume Stuffit Expander,
before you install the application on your
smartphone.
1 Windows: Drag and drop
the file(s) onto the Palm
Quick Install icon on the
Windows desktop.
Mac: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the
Send To Device droplet in the Palm
folder.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
You can open a window to select whether
to install files on your smartphone or on an
expansion card.
TIP
Windows: Double-click the Palm Quick
Install icon.
Mac: Open the HotSync menu and select
Install Handheld files.
On a Windows computer, you can also
access Palm™ Quick Install by selecting the
Quick Install icon in Palm® Desktop software
or from the Programs folder in the Start
menu.
TIP
Getting help with third-party applications
If you encounter a problem with a
third-party application (such as an error
message), contact the application’s author
or vendor. For general troubleshooting of
third-party applications, see Third-party
applications.
159
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
Removing
applications
2 If you want to remove an application
from an expansion card, insert the card
into your Treo smartphone.
If you decide that you no longer need an
application, or you want to free up
memory, you can remove apps from your
smartphone or an expansion card (for more
on expansion cards, see Inserting and
removing expansion cards). You can
remove only apps, patches, and extensions
that you install; you cannot remove the
built-in apps that reside in the ROM portion
of your Treo smartphone.
4 Select Delete on the App menu.
3 Press Menu
DID YOU KNOW? Some applications are
factory-installed on your smartphone and
cannot be deleted. These are listed with a
Lock icon next to them.
Applications deleted from your
smartphone are kept on your computer in the
Archive folder of your user folder. If you’re
having trouble locating your user folder, see I
can’t find my user folder.
DID YOU KNOW?
1 Press Applications
160
.
.
5 Select the Delete From pick list and
select the location of the application you
want to remove: Phone or Card.
6 Select the application that you want to
remove.
7 Select Delete.
8 Synchronize to remove the application
from the Backup folder on your
computer.
Manually deleting applications
If an app you delete reappears on your
smartphone, you may need to manually
delete the app from your computer.
1 Locate your Backup subfolder on your
computer.
Windows: C:\Program
Files\Palm\.
Mac: Mac
HD\Applications\Palm\Users\.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
If you upgraded from a previous version
of Palm Desktop, your Backup subfolder
may be located in the palmOne or
Handspring folder.
2 If you find a PRC or PDB file for the
application you just removed, delete the
file from the Backup subfolder.
3 Delete the file from your device again.
Viewing application
info
The Info screens display basic statistics
about the applications on your Treo
smartphone.
1 Press Applications
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Info on the App menu.
Version: The version numbers of
applications on your smartphone.
Size: The size (in kilobytes) of
applications and information on your
smartphone.
Records: The number of entries in
various applications on your
smartphone.
5 Scroll to the application you want to see
info about.
6 Select Done.
4 Select the Device pick list and select
the location of the app you want to view
info for: Phone or .
161
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
Sending information
with Bluetooth®
wireless technology
4 Select the entry or category you want to
send. You cannot send an item that has
a lock
next to it.
5 Press Menu
.
6 Select Send from the leftmost menu.
7 Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
The range of Bluetooth® wireless
technology is up to 30 feet (10 meters) in
optimum environmental conditions.
Performance and range may be affected by
physical obstacles, radio interference from
nearby electronic equipment, and other
factors.
9 Wait for a message to indicate that the
transfer is complete before you
continue using your smartphone.
Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
Sending an app over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
In most applications you can send an
individual entry or item such as a contact or
a picture. You can also send all the entries
in a category, such as all contacts in the
Business category.
1 Press Applications
Bluetooth
.
1 Press Applications
Bluetooth
.
5 Select Send from the App menu.
2 Select Bluetooth On.
3 Open an application.
162
and select
8 Select the receiving device(s) in the
Discovery Results list, and then select
OK.
and select
2 Select Bluetooth On.
3 Press Applications
4 Press Menu
.
.
6 Select the Send From pick list and
select the location of the app you want
to send: Phone or .
7 Select the application you want to
transfer. You cannot send an item that
has a lock
next to it.
8 Select Send.
9 Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
10 Select the receiving device(s) on the
Discovery Results screen, and then
select OK.
11 Wait for a message to indicate that the
transfer is complete before you
continue using your smartphone.
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices
that are not on your Trusted Device list
to request a connection with your
smartphone during the next two
minutes. Your smartphone reverts to
the Hidden setting and becomes
inaccessible to other devices after two
minutes.
4 Use the other device to discover your
smartphone and send information to it:
•
See the other device’s documentation
to learn how to discover and send
information over a Bluetooth wireless
connection.
•
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound
On
, your smartphone beeps to
notify you of the connection, and then
prompts you to accept the info. Select
a category or expansion card to file
the item. If you don't select a
category, the item goes into the
Unfiled category.
Receiving info over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
1 Press Applications
Bluetooth
.
and select
2 Select Bluetooth On.
3 Select the Visibility pick list and select
one of the following:
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that
are not on your Trusted Device list to
request a connection with your
smartphone. Your smartphone remains
accessible to other devices until you
turn this option off. After you’re done
using this setting, remember to change
it back to Hidden.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
5 Select Yes to receive the information or
No to refuse it.
163
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
Beaming an entry
The Device Name in the Bluetooth app is
the name other devices with Bluetooth
wireless technology see when they connect
to your smartphone. The default name is the
name you gave your device during setup. You
can change this name if you want to.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? When you receive an
application over a Bluetooth connection, you
can store the application on your smartphone
or send it to an expansion card inserted into
the expansion card slot.
Beam your business card in two key
presses: From the Main View in the Phone
application, press Menu, and then press the
M key.
TIP
Beaming information
1 Select the entry or category you want to
beam. You cannot beam an item that
has a lock
next to it.
Your Treo 700P smartphone is equipped
with an IR (infrared) port so that you can
beam information to another Palm OS®
device with an IR port. The IR port is
located on the top of your smartphone,
between the antenna and the Ringer
switch, behind the small dark shield.
2 Press Menu
For best results, the path between the
two devices must be clear of obstacles, and
both devices must be stationary. If you have
difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and
avoid bright sunlight.
TIP
164
You can beam an individual entry or item
such as a contact or a picture. You can also
beam all the entries in the selected
category, such as all the contacts in the
Business or Family category.
.
3 Select Record, and then select one of
the following:
Beam: Sends an individual record.
Beam Category: Sends all entries in the
current category.
If you beam a bookmark or
saved page from the web browser, it beams
the URL, not the contents of that page.
DID YOU KNOW?
4 When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, point the IR port on your Treo
smartphone directly at the IR port of the
receiving device.
5 Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to
indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue using your
smartphone.
2 Press Menu
.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
3 Select Beam from the App menu.
4 Select the Beam From pick list, and
select whether the application you want
to beam is located on your Treo
smartphone or on an expansion card.
5 Select the application you want to
transfer.
6 Select Beam.
7 When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, point the IR port on your
smartphone directly at the IR port of the
receiving device.
8 Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to
indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue using your
smartphone.
Receiving beamed information
1 Turn on your screen.
2 Select the beam command on the
transmitting device.
Beaming an application
Not all applications can be beamed. A lock
icon
appears on the Beam screen next
to applications that cannot be beamed.
1 Press Applications
.
3 Point the IR port on your Treo
smartphone directly at the IR port of the
transmitting device to open the Beam
Status dialog box.
165
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
4 When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, select a category for the entry.
5 Select Yes to receive the information or
No to refuse it.
If you do not select a category upon
receiving a beamed item, the item is placed in
the Unfiled category.
Synchronizing
information—
advanced
TIP
If you can’t receive beamed information,
make sure the Beam Receive option is turned
on (see Optimizing power settings), and that
you are not running a third-party application
that disables beaming. If you still can’t receive
a beam, try a soft reset (see Resetting your
smartphone).
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? You can store a beamed
application on your smartphone, or send it to
an expansion card inserted into the expansion
card slot.
Changing which applications sync
By default, information from Calendar,
Contacts, Memos, Pics&Videos, and Tasks
is updated each time you synchronize your
smartphone with Palm Desktop software
or Microsoft Outlook. You can change
which applications synchronize. For
example, if you don’t use the Memos
application and you want to speed up
synchronization, you can turn off
synchronization for Memos.
Windows If you set up your
smartphone to sync with Outlook, you can
learn how to change which applications
synchronize, by doing the following: Click the
HotSync® manager icon in the taskbar and
select Custom. Select a conduit that syncs
with Outlook, click Change, and then click
Help.
TIP
166
WINDOWS ONLY
1 Click HotSync manager
in the
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your
screen.
2 Select Custom.
3 Select your device name from the User
list at the top of the screen.
4 Select the application for which you
want to turn synchronization on or off,
and then click Change.
5 Select Synchronize the files to turn on
synchronization for an app.
Select Do nothing to turn off
synchronization for an app that currently
synchronizes (for example, to turn off
synchronization for Memos if you do not
use this app).
NOTE Select one of the two overwrite
options if you want the information in one
location (smartphone or computer) to
completely replace the information in the
other location for that app. For example, if
the Calendar info on your smartphone is
accurate but the info on your computer has
become corrupted, select Handheld
overwrites Desktop for the Calendar app
to have your smartphone info replace your
computer info. Note that “handheld” refers
to your smartphone and “desktop” refers
to your computer.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
6 (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for
each application for which you want to
turn synchronization on or off.
7 Click OK, and then click Done.
Windows To keep the current sync
setting on an ongoing basis, check the Set as
default box. If you do not check this box, the
option you select applies only the next time
you synchronize. Thereafter, info is updated
according to the default setting.
TIP
167
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
NOTE Select one of the two overwrite
MAC ONLY
1 Double-click the Palm Desktop
in the Palm folder.
icon
2 From the HotSync menu, select
Conduit Settings.
3 From the User pop-up menu, select
your device name.
4 Select the application for which you
want to turn synchronization on or off,
and then click Conduit Settings.
5 Select Synchronize the files to turn on
synchronization for an app.
Select Do nothing to turn off
synchronization for an app that currently
synchronizes (for example, to turn off
synchronization for Memos if you do not
use this app).
options if you want the information in one
location (smartphone or computer) to
completely replace the information in the
other location for that app. For example, if
the Calendar info on your smartphone is
accurate but the info on your computer has
become corrupted, select Handheld
overwrites Macintosh for the Calendar
app to have your smartphone info replace
your computer info. Note that “handheld”
refers to your smartphone.
6 (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for
each application for which you want to
turn synchronization on or off.
7 Click OK, and then close the Conduit
Settings window.
TIP Mac To keep the current setting on an
ongoing basis, select Make Default. If you do
not select this button, the option you select
applies only the next time you synchronize.
Thereafter, info is updated according to the
default setting.
168
Setting up a Bluetooth connection for
synchronization
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can synchronize
wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection.
1 Press Applications
Bluetooth
.
and select
2 Select Bluetooth On.
3 Enter a device name for your
smartphone. This is the name that
appears on the other Bluetooth device’s
screen when it connects to your
smartphone.
4 Select the Visibility pick list and select
Visible or Temporary.
After you form a partnership with a device,
you can change the Visibility setting to
Hidden. That way only devices with which
you’ve already formed a partnership can find
your smartphone. New devices cannot
request a connection.
TIP
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
5 Select Setup Devices.
6 Select HotSync Setup.
7 Follow the onscreen instructions to
create a partnership between your
smartphone and your computer.
In some cases you may need to
perform setup steps on your computer
before you can complete this step.
Check your computer’s documentation
for specific setup instructions.
169
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
8 After you finish the HotSync Setup,
select Done to return to Applications
View.
You’re now ready to sync your smartphone
with your Bluetooth computer.
3 Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon, and then select the name of the
PC you set up for Bluetooth
synchronization (see Setting up a
Bluetooth connection for
synchronization).
Synchronizing over a Bluetooth
connection
4 Select the HotSync
smartphone.
When you synchronize using your
smartphone’s Bluetooth wireless feature,
you don’t need your sync cable. This is
especially useful if you travel with a laptop
enabled with Bluetooth wireless
technology.
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your
smartphone screen. Be patient;
synchronization may take a few minutes.
1 Press Applications
HotSync
.
and select
icon on your
Synchronizing over an infrared
connection
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your computer must
include the following items:
2 Select Local.
170
•
An enabled IR port and driver or have an
IR device attached to it. Check your
computer’s documentation to see if it
supports IR communication.
•
HotSync manager must be active. On a
Windows computer, you know HotSync
manager is active when its icon appears
in the lower-right corner of your screen.
When you synchronize using your
smartphone’s IR port, you don’t need a
cable. This is especially useful if you travel
with an IR-enabled laptop.
6 Select the HotSync
smartphone.
WINDOWS ONLY
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your
smartphone screen. Be patient;
synchronization may take a few minutes.
1 On your computer, click HotSync
manager
in the taskbar in the
lower-right corner of your screen. Make
sure that Infrared is selected.
icon on your
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
MAC ONLY
1 Double-click HotSync manager
the Palm folder.
in
2 Click the HotSync Controls tab, and
then select Enabled.
3 Click the Connection Settings tab, and
then check the On box next to IR port.
4 Close the HotSync Software Setup
window.
2 On your smartphone, press
Applications
and select
HotSync
.
3 Select Local.
4 Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
5 Position the IR port of your smartphone
within a few inches of the IR port of
your computer.
5 On your smartphone, press
Applications
and select
HotSync
.
6 Select Local.
7 Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
8 Position the IR port of your smartphone
within a few inches of the IR port of
your computer.
9 Select the HotSync
smartphone.
icon on your
171
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your
smartphone screen. Be patient;
synchronization may take a few minutes.
Using expansion
cards
The expansion card slot on your Treo
smartphone enables you to add SD cards
and MultiMediaCard cards to extend the
storage capacity of your smartphone. For
example, SD or MultiMediaCard expansion
cards can store:
172
•
Photos
•
MP3 audio files
•
Email attachments
•
Games
•
eBooks
•
Microsoft Office files
•
Adobe Acrobat files
•
Applications
•
Databases
SD cards are faster than MultiMediaCard
cards for reading and writing information, and
SD cards also offer write-protection.
TIP
Your Treo 700P smartphone is also
compatible with SDIO cards, which you
can use to add accessories, such as a
presentation module, to your smartphone.
Although expansion cards are sold
separately, your smartphone includes a
dummy, nonfunctional card inside the
expansion card slot to keep out dust and
other debris.
Inserting and removing expansion cards
1 Press down and release the dummy
card.
2 After you feel the expansion card slot
eject the dummy card, remove the card
from the slot.
3 Hold your smartphone with the screen
facing you, and hold the card with the
label facing you. The notch on the card
should be in the lower-left corner next to
the antenna.
4 Insert the card into the expansion card
slot until you feel it lock into place.
Opening applications on an expansion
card
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
After you insert an expansion card into the
expansion card slot, you can open any of
the applications stored on the expansion
card.
1 Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. Applications View
automatically appears.
Notch
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On,
you hear a confirmation tone when you insert
or remove an expansion card.
TIP
When you’re not using the expansion card,
reinsert the dummy card to keep the
expansion card slot clean.
TIP
2 Select the icon for the application you
want to open.
3 Press Center
application.
to open the
Install the Files application from the Palm
Software Installation CD to easily browse and
manage files on an expansion card.
TIP
173
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
Accessing items stored on an expansion
card
When an expansion card contains items,
such as pictures or songs, you can access
those items directly from the card.
You can copy applications from your Treo
smartphone to your expansion card and
vice versa.
1 Press Applications
.
1 Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. Applications View
automatically appears.
2 Select the category pick list in the title
bar, and select All.
3 Select the icon for the application in
which you want to open the item. For
example, to view a picture, select
Pics&Videos.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Copy from the App menu.
Copying applications between an
expansion card and your smartphone
Before you copy an application to an
expansion card, make sure that it is
compatible with Palm OS software version
5.4.5 or later. Some applications do not work
with expansion cards and do not allow you to
store files in a location that is separate from
the application.
TIP
174
4 Select the Copy To pick list and select
the destination: Phone or .
5 Select the From pick list and select the
location of the application you want to
copy: Phone or .
6 Highlight the application you want to
copy.
7 Select Copy.
Viewing expansion card information
Renaming an expansion card
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
If you change the contents of an expansion
card, you may at some point want to
rename the card to better match its
contents.
1 Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot.
2 Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select All.
The Card Info application displays general
information about the expansion card that
is currently in the expansion slot, and it
enables you to rename and format a card.
Press Applications
Card Info
.
and select
Before copying information to, renaming,
or formatting an expansion card, make sure
the card is not write-protected. See the
instructions that came with your card for
details.
TIP
3 Select Card Info
4 Press Menu
.
.
5 Select Rename Card from the Card
menu.
6 Enter a new name for the card.
7 Select OK.
Formatting an expansion card
Formatting an expansion card is similar to
formatting a disk on a computer. When
you format an expansion card, you erase all
the information stored on the card.
1 Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot.
2 Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select All.
175
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
3 Select Card Info
4 Press Menu
.
.
5 Select Format Card from the Card menu.
176
6 Enter a new name for the card.
7 Select OK.
CHAPT ER
10
Your personal settings
Customizing your Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone is great way
to make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you.
On your smartphone, you can easily customize the sounds,
fonts, screen colors, and more. Take advantage of different
levels of security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive)
phone call by locking the keyboard. Some settings can help
extend the life of your smartphone battery. There are lots of
ways to make your smartphone work better for you.
Benefits
•
Access applications quickly
•
Make your screen easy to read
•
Conserve power
•
Enjoy your smartphone more
In this chapter
System sound settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
System sound
settings
When you slide the Ringer switch back to
the Sound On position, it restores the
previous sound settings.
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
Silencing sounds
You can immediately silence all alerts,
ringtones, music that plays through the
built-in speaker, and system sounds by
sliding the Ringer switch to the Sound Off
position. This does not mute the audio
during a phone call.
Sound On
Sound Off
Setting system volume levels
Your smartphone includes a
silent alarm that can vibrate even when the
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off. For info on
setting the vibrate option, see the section on
setting alert tones in the chapters that
describe the individual applications.
DID YOU KNOW?
1 Slide the Ringer switch to the Sound
Off
position. Your smartphone
vibrates once to let you know that
you’ve turned sounds off.
2 To hear all sounds again, slide the
Ringer switch to the Sound On
position.
You can set the volume level for system
sounds, such as the tone that plays when
you synchronize.
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off,
the ringer setting overrides the sound settings
and all sounds are turned off.
TIP
1 Press Applications
Sounds
.
and select
2 Select the Application pick list and
select System.
3 Select the System Volume and Game
Volume pick lists and select the volume
levels.
179
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
CHAPTER
10
Backlight
2 Press Left
brightness.
4 Select Done.
and Right
to adjust the
3 Select Done.
Display and
appearance settings
To automatically set the backlight to the
preset low setting, press Option + Menu.
TIP
You can also adjust the backlight and set
the brightness duration during a call in Power
Preferences. See Optimizing power settings.
TIP
Adjusting the brightness
Depending on the lighting conditions in
which you’re using your smartphone, you
may need to adjust the brightness of the
screen and keyboard backlight.
1 Press Option
Backlight
.
, and then press
Changing the screen font
You can change the screen font in
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Messaging,
Tasks, and Web. The font styles may vary
between applications and some
applications may offer fewer choices.
1 Open the application in which you want
to change the font.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select Font.
180
4 Select a font style. (In the web browser,
select the Font size pick list and select
Large or Small.)
Small
font
Large
font
3 Set any of the following preferences:
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
Preset to: The standard number
conventions for your country. When you
select a country, the other Formats
Preferences are automatically set to
that country’s conventions. You can also
edit each option individually.
Small Large
bold bold
font font
5 Select OK.
Setting display formats
Formats Preferences enable you to select
number conventions based on geographic
regions. For example, in the United
Kingdom, time often is expressed using a
24-hour clock. In the United States, time is
expressed using a 12-hour clock with an
AM or a PM suffix. Many of the built-in
applications on your Treo smartphone use
the Formats Preferences settings.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
2 Select Formats.
and select
Time: The time format. Select HH:MM
to display a 24-hour clock.
Date: The date format.
Week starts: The first day of the week
(usually Sunday or Monday).
Numbers: The format for numbers with
decimal points and commas.
4 Select Done.
181
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
3 Select a color scheme from the list.
Aligning the screen
Occasionally, your smartphone screen may
need to be readjusted. If this occurs, you
may see the wrong feature being activated
when you tap the screen. To fix the
problem, you can align the screen at any
time.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
2 Select Touchscreen.
3 Follow the onscreen instructions and
tap the screen where indicated.
4 Select Done.
You can also set the wallpaper for the
Main View in the Phone application (see
Customizing the Main View in the Phone
application) and the background for the
Calendar Agenda View (see Customizing
display options for your calendar).
TIP
Applications settings
4 Select Done.
Changing the system color scheme
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
2 Select Color Theme.
182
and select
You can change the Applications settings
on your smartphone so that you can easily
access the applications you use most
often. You can arrange and display your
applications by category, reassign
the buttons on your smartphone, and
select default applications for specific
tasks.
Displaying applications by category
Arranging applications by category
•
You can assign an application to a category
and then display a specific category of
applications in Applications View.
Press Applications
repeatedly to
cycle through the categories.
•
Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select a category.
Select All to display all of your
applications.
1 Press Applications
2 Press Menu
.
Do one of the following:
.
3 Select Category on the App menu.
Changing Applications View
4 Select the pick list next to each
application and select a category.
By default, Applications View displays each
application as an icon. As an alternative,
you can view a list of applications. The list
view is particularly useful when you have
so many applications in a category that the
applications fill up more than one screen.
5 Select Done.
To create a new category, select the
category pick list and select Edit Categories.
Select New, and then enter the category
name. Select OK to close the dialog box, and
then select OK.
TIP
If there is an expansion card in
the expansion slot, the card appears in the
category pick list and is treated as a category
when you press Applications repeatedly.
DID YOU KNOW?
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
1 Press Applications
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
4 Select the View By pick list and select
List.
5 Select OK.
183
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
Reassigning buttons
With Buttons Preferences you can select
which applications are associated with the
quick buttons and the Side button on your
Treo smartphone. You can assign a primary
and secondary application to each of the
three quick buttons that open an
application.
NOTE We recommend that you keep the
primary button assignments on the factory
settings until you become comfortable with
the features of your smartphone. If you do
change the primary button assignments,
remember that the instructions in this
guide and in the other help features refer to
the original button settings.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
2 Select Buttons.
3 Select the pick list next to the button,
Option
+ button, or Side button that
you want to reassign, and then select
an application.
184
4 Select Done.
You can also choose an
application to open with the sync button on
the USB sync cable. To change this setting,
select HotSync on the Buttons Preferences
screen.
DID YOU KNOW?
To restore all the buttons and key
combinations to their factory settings, select
Default.
TIP
Some third-party applications
automatically take over a button when you
install the application.
DID YOU KNOW?
Changing default applications
Sometimes one application looks for
another application to handle information
(for example, a mail application might open
a browser when you select a link in an
email message). Your smartphone comes
with a set of predefined applications to
handle email, messaging, and browser
requests from other applications. If you
have more than one application to handle
these requests on your smartphone, you
can specify which application you want to
use for each function.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
Locking your
smartphone and info
Your Treo smartphone includes several
features to protect your smartphone
from inadvertent use and keep your
information private. You can lock any of the
following features on your smartphone:
•
Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the
Keyguard feature to disable the
keyboard and all buttons to prevent
accidental presses in your bag or
pocket.
•
Screen: You can disable the screen’s
touch-sensitive feature during an active
call or call alert.
•
Phone (Phone Lock): You can set your
phone to require a password to make
calls. The built-in security software lets
you make emergency calls even if your
phone is locked.
•
Smartphone: You can set your
smartphone to require a password for
you to see any information on your
smartphone.
and select
2 Select Default Apps.
3 Select each pick list and select the
application you want to associate with
that function.
4 Select Done.
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
185
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
•
Entries: You can mask or hide entries
marked as private and set your
smartphone to require a password for
viewing them.
Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)
The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so
that you don’t accidentally press buttons or
activate items on the screen while your
smartphone is in a pocket or bag.
If you disabled Keyguard, you can turn
Keyguard on manually by pressing Option +
Power/End when the screen is on.
TIP
By default, Keyguard turns on whenever
the screen is off. Each time you wake up
the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to
unlock the keyboard and use your
smartphone.
To turn off Keyguard, do the following:
1 When the screen is off, press Power/
End
to wake up the screen.
2 Press Center
to turn off Keyguard.
You can change how quickly Keyguard turns
on, or you can disable this feature
altogether. To change the Keyguard
settings, do the following:
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
2 Select Keyguard.
3 Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and
then do one of the following:
•
186
Select how quickly you want Keyguard
to turn on: When power is turned
off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30
seconds after power off.
•
Select Disable to completely disable
the Keyguard feature until you turn it
on again.
4 Select Done.
Locking your screen
You can set your smartphone to
automatically lock the screen’s
touch-sensitive features in certain
situations.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
2 Select Keyguard.
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
4 Select Done.
When you check the boxes to
disable the touchscreen during a call, the
touchscreen is automatically enabled again
after you end the call.
DID YOU KNOW?
Locking your phone (Phone Lock)
You can lock your phone to prevent
unauthorized calls and use of other
wireless features. When your phone is
locked, you must enter the correct code to
unlock it. You can still place emergency
calls when your phone is locked, however.
3 Check any of the following boxes:
Incoming calls received: Disables the
screen when the phone rings. You must
use the 5-way
to select the
onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons,
or press Send
to answer the call
or Power/End
to ignore the call.
On a call: Disables the screen after
you answer a call. You must use the
5-way
to select the onscreen
buttons during the call. Use this setting
to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen
buttons while you’re holding your
smartphone near your ear to speak.
When Phone Lock is turned on, other
people can still see the info on your
smartphone, but they cannot make calls or
use the other wireless features without your
password.
TIP
1 Press Phone
.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select Phone
Lock.
4 (Optional) Select Advanced, enter up
to three numbers that you can dial
when your phone is locked, and then
187
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
select OK. You do not need to enter the
standard emergency call number for
your area, such as 911, as one of the
three numbers, because this number is
always available.
5 Select one of the following Phone Lock
options:
On phone power off: Locks your phone
each time you turn it off. When this
setting is active, you must enter your
lock code each time you turn your phone
on again.
Immediately: Locks your phone when
you select OK. The next time you dial a
number, you must enter your lock code
to unlock your phone. After that, you
can continue to make calls without
entering your lock code, unless you
select one of these Phone Lock options.
6 When prompted, enter the lock code,
and then select OK. (Unless you
changed your lock code, the lock code is
the last four digits of your phone
number.)
7 If you want to change the lock code,
select Change Lock Code, enter a new
188
lock code, and then select OK. Repeat
this step to verify the new lock code.
8 Select OK.
If you selected Immediately in step 5, your
phone locks right away. If you selected On
phone power off, your phone locks the next
time you press and hold Power/End
to turn off your phone.
If you want to lock your phone once in a
while, use the Immediately option to lock your
phone on demand.
TIP
To disable the current Phone Lock settings:
1 Press Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select Phone
Lock.
3 Uncheck the On phone power off box.
4 Enter your lock code to change this
setting.
5 Select OK twice.
Locking your smartphone
To protect your personal information, you
can lock your smartphone, so that you
need to enter your password to access any
of your information or use any of the
features on your smartphone, including the
phone. You can, however, still make
emergency calls when your smartphone is
locked.
3 Assign a password and a password hint.
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
4 Select the Auto Lock Device box.
5 When prompted, enter your password
and select OK.
6 Select one of the following options:
IMPORTANT If you lock your smartphone,
you must enter the exact password to
unlock it. If you forget the password, you
need to perform a hard reset to resume
using your smartphone. Performing a hard
reset deletes all the entries in your
smartphone. However, you can restore all
previously synchronized info the next time
you sync (see Synchronizing information—
the basics).
1 Press Applications
Security
.
Never: Prevents your smartphone from
locking automatically.
and select
2 Select the Password box.
On power off: Locks your smartphone
when you turn off the screen, or when it
shuts off with the Auto-off feature.
At a preset time: Locks your
smartphone at a specific time of day.
After a preset delay: Locks your
smartphone after a period of inactivity.
7 Select OK.
189
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
8 Do one of the following:
•
Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your
smartphone immediately.
•
Press Applications
to accept
your settings and continue using your
smartphone.
After you create a password, you can lock
your system manually. Press Applications
and select Security. Select Lock & Turn Off,
and then select Off & Lock.
1 Display the entry that you want to mark
private.
To change your password, select the
Password box, enter your current password,
and then enter the new password. To delete
your password, select the Password box and
then select Unassign.
3 Check the Private box.
TIP
TIP
Working with private entries
In most applications you can mark
individual entries as private. All private
entries remain visible and accessible until
you select the Security setting. You have
two Security setting options:
190
After you enable the mask or hide setting,
any entries marked as private are
immediately hidden or masked. If you
define a password, you must enter it to
display private entries. If you do not define
a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal
private entries without a password.
•
Hide Records: Private entries do not
appear anywhere in the application.
•
Mask Records: Private entries are
replaced with a visual placeholder
where the entry would normally appear.
2 Select Details.
4 Select OK.
Hiding or masking all private entries
Make sure the entries you want to mask or
hide are marked private.
1 Press Applications
Security
.
and select
2 Select the Current Privacy pick list and
select either Hide Records or Mask
Records.
3 If prompted for your password, enter it
and then select OK.
Viewing all private records
You can reveal all the entries you’ve hidden
or masked.
1 Press Applications
Security
.
and select
2 Select the Current Privacy pick list and
select Show Records.
3 If prompted for your password, enter it
and then select OK.
You can also access the system-wide
security settings while you’re in an
application, such as Calendar. Press Menu,
select Options, and then select Security.
TIP
®
Security and Palm Desktop software
(Windows)
The Windows version of Palm® Desktop
software observes the security password
for your Treo smartphone. If you forget
your password, you cannot view your
information in Palm Desktop. If your
smartphone is unlocked, you can change
your password on your smartphone, but all
entries marked as private are deleted. You
can restore your private entries the next
time you sync.
Follow these steps to recover from a lost
password:
1 Press Applications
Security
.
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
and select
2 Select the Password box.
3 Select Lost Password.
4 Select Yes.
If you want additional security for
Palm Desktop files, you may want to
purchase a third-party solution.
TIP
Entering owner information
You can use Owner Preferences to record
information that you want to associate with
your Treo smartphone, such as your name,
company name, and home phone number.
If you lock your smartphone (see Locking
your smartphone), the Owner Preferences
information appears on the screen that
requests your password to unlock it, and
you must also enter your password to
change the Owner Preferences
information.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
2 Select Owner.
191
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
3 If you assigned a password with the
Security application, select Unlock,
enter your password, and then select
OK to continue.
4 Enter the text that you want to appear in
the Owner Preferences screen.
date, time, and location setting for your
Treo smartphone.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
2 Select Date & Time.
3 To manually set the date and time,
uncheck the Get date & Time from
mobile network box. Select the Date
field and select the date, and then
select the Time field and select the
time.
5 Select Done.
System settings
Setting the date and time
By default, your smartphone synchronizes
the date, time, and time zone with the
network when your phone is on and you
are inside a coverage area. Date & Time
Preferences enable you to manually set the
192
4 To manually set the time zone, uncheck
the Get time zone from mobile
network box. If you unchecked the date
and time box in step 3, the time zone
box is automatically unchecked. Select
the Set Location pick list, and then
select a city in your time zone.
3 Set any of the following preferences:
If a city in the same time zone is not on
the list, select Edit List, select Add, select a
city in your time zone, and then select OK. If
necessary, modify any of the settings in the
Edit Location dialog box, and then select OK.
TIP
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
Brightness: Sets the intensity of the
screen and keyboard backlights. Drag
the slider or press Left and Right
to adjust the brightness level.
DID YOU KNOW? If you uncheck the date and
time box, the time zone box is disabled and
you cannot have the network automatically
set the time zone. However, you can choose
to have the network set the date and time,
but manually set the time zone.
5 Select OK.
6 Select Done.
You can also set time zones for Calendar
events. See Creating an event.
TIP
Optimizing power settings
Power Preferences enable you to adjust
settings to maximize your smartphone’s
battery performance.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
2 Select Power.
and select
Auto-off after: Determines how long
your screen stays on during a period of
inactivity. When there is no interaction
with the keyboard or screen for the
specified time period, your smartphone
turns off automatically.
On a call, dim backlight after:
Determines how long the backlight
stays on at normal intensity during a
phone call. After the specified time
period, the backlight dims to conserve
power during a long phone call.
193
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
Beam Receive: Determines whether
your Treo smartphone is ready to
receive information over an infrared
beam. If you leave this option turned off,
you must return to this screen to turn
on this option the next time you want to
receive a beam.
4 Select Done.
You can also access the brightness setting
by pressing Option + P. To temporarily dim
the screen’s brightness, press Option +
Menu.
TIP
server through the company’s firewall
(security layer). You need a VPN client on
your smartphone if your smartphone and
your company’s server are located on
opposite sides of the firewall.
Check with your company’s system
administrator to see if a VPN is required to
access the corporate server. If a VPN is
necessary, you must purchase and install a
third-party VPN client on your smartphone
to use this feature.
For information about third-party VPN
client software, see the Palm Software
Installation CD or visit www.palm.com/
treo700pcdma-mytreo.
TIP
Connection settings
Connecting to a virtual private network
If you want to use your Treo smartphone to
access your corporate email account or
other files on your corporate server, you
may need to set up a virtual private
network (VPN) on your smartphone. A VPN
enables you to log in to your corporate
194
1 Install your third-party VPN client. See
Installing applications for details.
2 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
3 Select VPN.
4 Enter the settings provided by your
corporate system administrator.
CHAPT ER
11
Common questions
Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have,
this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly
asked questions. For additional information and answers to
other common questions, visit www.palm.com/
treo700pcdma-support.
In this chapter
Upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Desktop software installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Making room on your Treo smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Upgrading
If you experience problems with your
Palm® Treo™ 700P smartphone after
performing the upgrade steps in this guide,
you may have incompatible applications or
settings that were not quarantined during
the installation process. These
incompatible applications or settings can
lead to numerous issues, including system
resets and freezes. If you experience a
problem after upgrading, follow the steps
in this section to remove the incompatible
apps from your smartphone and to transfer
your other info to your new smartphone.
NOTE If you have trouble installing a
third-party application, contact the
developer for assistance.
We recommend that you do not install
apps that do any of the following:
•
Modify phone functions, such as
ringtones, dialing, or caller ID
•
Replace organizer features, such as
Contacts or Calendar
•
Set data connection features, such as
activating or ending data connections
•
Provide web clipping features, such as
PQA files
•
Provide instant messaging features
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
If you want to continue using these types
of applications, please contact the
third-party developer for software updates
and info about compatibility with your Treo
700P smartphone.
WINDOWS ONLY
1 On your computer, click
Start>Programs>Palm>Safe HotSync.
2 Follow the instructions on the screen.
3 Locate the Old_Apps folder on your
computer. This folder is usually located
inside one of the following folders:
C:\Program Files\Palm\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
4 To help you identify the app that is
causing the problem, move one app at a
time from the Old_Apps folder to the
Backup folder, and then sync.
197
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
If the problem recurs, delete the last
app you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
5 Repeat step 4 for each of the apps in
the Old_Apps folder.
NOTE If you have trouble moving apps
from the Old_Apps folder to the Backup
folder, or determining which files to move,
try reinstalling the app using the original
third-party developer files.
Need more info on the Backup folder? See
What is the backup folder?.
TIP
MAC ONLY
1 Locate your user folder on your
computer.
NOTE Your user folder name is the same
as your device name and is usually found in
this location: : Users :
: Documents :
Palm : Users
2 Select your user folder and Option-drag
it to your Mac desktop to make a copy
of that folder.
198
3 Confirm that your copy includes the
Backup subfolder and that all the files in
the original Backup subfolder are also in
the copy of the Backup subfolder.
4 Delete all files from the original Backup
subfolder.
5 Perform a hard reset on your Treo 700P
smartphone. See Resetting your
smartphone for instructions.
6 Sync your new smartphone with your
new desktop software and be sure to
select your existing device name from
the User list.
7 To help you identify the app that is
causing the problem, move one
third-party app from the copy of the
Backup subfolder to the original
Backup subfolder, and then sync.
If the problem recurs, delete the last
app you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
8 Repeat step 7 for each of the third-party
apps in the copy of the Backup folder.
Desktop software
installation
If you are having trouble installing the
desktop software, you may have the wrong
version of the software or some of your
computer’s resources may be unavailable.
The Palm Software Installation CD installs
software that lets you synchronize using
Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook
for Windows. If you want to synchronize using
a different personal information manager
(PIM), you must install a third-party solution.
Contact the PIM’s author or vendor to learn if
software is available for your new Treo
smartphone.
TIP
3 Quit any active applications, including
virus scanners and Internet security
applications.
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
4 Make sure you’re installing the software
from the Palm Software Installation CD
that came with your new smartphone.
Other versions of the desktop software
may not work with this Treo
smartphone.
5 Insert the Palm Software Installation CD
to restart the installation.
IMPORTANT Always use the same
language for your Treo smartphone, your
operating system, and your desktop
software. Otherwise, you may lose
information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for
mismatched language setups.
Follow these steps to retry the installation:
1 Make sure your computer profile
includes administrator rights to install
software. In large organizations, these
are usually granted by the system
administrator.
2 Restart your computer.
Resetting your
smartphone
Performing a soft reset
A soft reset is similar to restarting a
computer. If your smartphone is not
199
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
responding or you have trouble
synchronizing with your computer, a soft
reset may help. All your info is retained
when you perform a soft reset.
1 Press the battery door release, and
slide the battery door downward
to remove it from your smartphone.
2 Use the stylus tip to gently press the
reset button on the back of your
smartphone.
Performing a system reset
A system reset, also called a safe or warm
reset, tells your smartphone to stop what
it’s doing and start over again without
loading any system extras. If your
smartphone loops or freezes during or after
a soft reset, a system reset may help.
Performing a system reset releases you
from an endless loop so that you can
uninstall a third-party application that may
be causing the looping.
1 Press the battery door release, and
slide the battery door downward
200
to remove it from your Treo
smartphone.
2 While pressing and holding Up , use
the tip of the stylus to gently press
the reset button on the back of your
device.
3 When the logo screen appears, release
Up .
4 Delete the third-party application that
you suspect is causing the problem.
5 Perform a soft reset. The wireless
features of your smartphone are not
available until you complete this step.
Performing a hard reset
related to software you installed. See
Third-party applications for suggestions on
diagnosing third-party software issues.
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
Some third-party applications do not
create a backup on your computer when you
synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you
may lose data in these applications and you
will need to reinstall the application after the
hard reset. Please contact the application’s
developer to find out which data is backed up
during synchronization.
TIP
1 Press the battery door release, and
slide the battery door downward to
remove it from your smartphone.
A hard reset erases all information and
third-party software on your Treo
smartphone. Never perform a hard reset
without first trying a soft reset and a
system reset. You can restore previously
synchronized information the next time you
sync.
2 While pressing and holding Power/End
, use the tip of the stylus to
gently press the reset button on the
back of your smartphone.
A hard reset may tell you whether a
problem stems from your smartphone or
from an application installed on it. If you do
not experience the problem after you
perform a hard reset, the problem is
4 When the Erase all data? prompt
appears, press Up
to confirm the
hard reset.
3 Continue pressing and holding Power/
End
. When the logo screen
appears, release Power/End
.
201
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
If you do not see the Erase all data?
message, the hard reset was not performed.
Retry these steps, making sure to hold
Power/End until the logo screen appears.
TIP
5 If a language selection screen appears,
select the same language you selected
for your desktop software.
IMPORTANT Always use the same
language for your Treo smartphone, your
operating system, and your desktop
software. Otherwise, you may lose
information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for
mismatched language setups.
6 Follow the onscreen instructions to
align the screen and set the date and
time.
Replacing the battery
Your Treo 700P smartphone comes with a
replaceable battery. Be sure to use a
replacement battery that is recommended
or sold by Palm and is compatible with the
202
Treo 700P smartphone. Failure to use the
proper battery may result in a risk of
personal injury or product damage, and it
voids your smartphone warranty.
1 Press Power/End
screen.
to turn off the
2 Press the battery door release, and
slide the battery door downward
to remove it from your smartphone.
3 Place a finger in the notch next to the
battery, and lift up the old battery at a
45-degree angle to remove it from the
compartment.
Battery door
release
Battery
contacts
Smartphone
contacts
Be sure to dispose of your old battery
properly. In some areas, disposal in household
or business trash is prohibited.
TIP
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
Screen
The screen appears blank
Notch
4 Align the metal contacts on the new
battery with the contacts inside the
battery compartment.
5 Insert the new battery into the
compartment at a 45-degree angle,
pressing it into place. Slide the battery
door onto the back of the smartphone
until it clicks into place.
6 Connect your smartphone to the
charger or sync cable.
7 Wait for your Treo smartphone to turn
on, and then enable the network time or
set the date and time when prompted.
1 When a call lasts longer than the limit
specified in Power Preferences, the
screen dims automatically. In certain
lighting conditions, the screen may
appear blank when this occurs.
Press any key except Power/End to
restore the screen to normal brightness.
Pressing Power/End hangs up the call.
2 When a period of inactivity lasts longer
than the limit specified in Power
Preferences, the screen turns off. Press
and release Power/End
to wake
up the screen.
3 Look closely at the screen. If you can
see a dim image, try adjusting the
screen brightness (see Adjusting the
brightness).
4 If the screen is still blank, perform a soft
reset (see Performing a soft reset).
203
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
5 If the problem persists, connect your
smartphone to the charger (see
Charging the battery) and perform a soft
reset again.
6 If that doesn’t work, perform a hard
reset (see Performing a hard reset).
To find carrying cases that protect the
screen and other useful accessories, visit
www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo.
TIP
The blinking bell in the upper-left corner of
the screen is the Alert screen symbol. It
appears when you have alarms or
messages that you haven’t acknowledged.
1 Press and hold Center
or tap the
blinking bell
with your stylus.
2 When the list of pending alerts appears,
do any of the following:
The screen doesn’t respond accurately to
taps or it activates wrong features
•
Select the alert text to view the item
and keep it in the list.
1 Press Applications
and use the
5-way
to select Prefs
.
•
Check the box next to an alert to clear
it from the list, and then select Done.
2 Use the 5-way
Touchscreen.
to select
3 Follow the onscreen instructions to
align the screen.
4 Select Done.
5 If the problem persists, check for dirt
between the screen and the edge of the
smartphone.
6 If you’re using a screen protector, make
sure that it is properly installed.
204
There’s a blinking bell in the upper-left
corner
Synchronization
Synchronization backs up the information
from your smartphone onto your computer
and vice versa. If you ever need to perform
a hard reset or otherwise need to erase all
your information on your smartphone, you
can synchronize your smartphone with
your computer to restore the info. Similarly,
if your computer crashes and your Palm
Desktop info is damaged, you can recover
your info by synchronizing with your
smartphone. To make sure you always
have an up-to-date backup of your info,
synchronize frequently.
This section describes synchronization
between your Treo smartphone and a
desktop computer running Palm Desktop
software. You can also synchronize the
information on your smartphone using
third-party applications. See the separate
documentation for the third-party
application for information on features and
configuration.
Before you attempt to synchronize, make
sure you’ve installed the desktop
synchronization software from the Palm
Software Installation CD.
Every device needs a unique name. Never
synchronize more than one device to the
same device name on your computer.
TIP
I can’t find my user folder
WINDOWS ONLY If your device name is
one word, your user folder name is the first
six characters of your device name. If your
device name is two words, your user folder
name consists of the first six characters of
the second word of your device name
followed by the first letter of the first word.
For example, if your device name is John
Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ.
Your user folder is usually located inside
one of the following folders:
C:\Program Files\Palm\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
MAC ONLY Your user folder name is the
same as your device name and is usually
found in this location: Mac hard drive :
Users : Your Mac username : Documents
: Palm : Users.
What is the backup folder?
The Backup folder is located inside your
user folder (see I can’t find my user folder).
During synchronization, HotSync® manager
puts a copy of most of your info and
applications in the Backup folder. (Some
third-party apps do not put a copy in the
Backup folder.) The next time you sync,
HotSync manager compares the contents
of the Backup folder to the contents of your
smartphone, and then restores any missing
info or applications.
205
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
If an app that you deleted reappears on
your smartphone, try deleting the app from
your Backup folder.
Programs, select Palm, and then select
HotSync Manager.
Palm Desktop does not respond to a sync
attempt
1 Make sure that the USB sync cable is
securely connected to the USB port on
your computer and on the bottom of
your smartphone (see Synchronizing
information—the basics).
If you’re having trouble trying to sync
using an IR or Bluetooth connection, try using
the USB sync cable instead. If this solves the
problem, then check your IR or Bluetooth
settings (see Synchronizing information—
advanced).
TIP
2 Make sure that HotSync manager is
running:
Windows: Right-click HotSync
manager
in the taskbar in the
lower-right corner of your computer
screen, and make sure that Local USB
is checked. If you don’t see the HotSync
manager icon, click Start, select
206
Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac
hard drive. Double-click HotSync
manager
in the Palm folder. In the
Connection Settings panel, set the
Local Setup port to Palm USB.
3 Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
4 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
soft reset).
5 Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
6 If problems persist and you’re
synchronizing through a USB hub, try
connecting the sync cable to a different
USB port or directly to your computer’s
built-in USB port.
7 Reboot your computer.
8 Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
9 Do one of the following:
Windows: Uninstall Palm software.
Click Start, select Settings, select
Control Panel, select Add or Remove
Programs, select Palm Desktop
software, and then click Change/
Remove.
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the
problem persists after completing step
7. Mac computers do not provide an
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software.
10 Reboot your computer.
11 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your smartphone.
Synchronization starts but stops without
finishing
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
The HotSync Log can give you information
about your most recent synchronization.
TIP
Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
your computer screen, and then select View
Log.
Mac: Open Palm Desktop software. From the
HotSync menu, select View Log.
If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS®
device or received a system error, such as
Sys0505, there may be conflicts with
software on your smartphone.
1 Locate your Backup subfolder and
rename the folder (for example,
BackupOld). Note that “Palm” in the
following locations might be
“Handspring” or “palmOne,” based on
the device you’re upgrading from:
Windows:
C:\Program Files\Palm\device name
Mac:
Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\
device name
207
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
2 Synchronize.
3 If the problem is resolved, begin
reinstalling your third-party applications
one at a time by double-clicking a single
file in the original Backup subfolder that
you renamed, and sync after each
application you install. If the problem
recurs, delete the last application you
installed and report the problem to its
developer.
4 Do one of the following:
Windows: If the Windows New
Hardware Wizard appears, the
synchronization process may be timing
out before the wizard completes its job.
Follow all instructions in the New
Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the
problem persists after completing step
3. Mac computers do not provide an
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software.
5 (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop
software. Click Start, select Settings,
select Control Panel, select Add or
Remove Programs, select
208
Palm Desktop software, and then click
Change/Remove.
6 Reboot your computer.
7 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your smartphone.
Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t
appear where it should
1 Make sure you’re synchronizing with
the intended desktop personal
information manager (PIM). The Palm
Software Installation CD enables you to
choose whether you want to
synchronize with Palm Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook for
Windows. Reinsert the installation CD
and select Change your
synchronization method if necessary.
If you use a different PIM, you need to
install third-party software to
synchronize. For more info, consult the
company that makes the PIM.
2 If multiple Palm OS devices are
synchronizing with your computer,
make sure you are synchronizing with
the correct device name. If info is not
appearing in Palm Desktop software,
make sure the correct device name is
selected in the User list on the toolbar
of Palm Desktop software.
3 Open HotSync manager on your
computer, and make sure the necessary
conduits are set to Synchronize the
files.
4 Do one of the following:
Windows: Uninstall Palm Desktop
software. Click Start, select Settings,
select Control Panel, select Add or
Remove Programs, select
Palm Desktop software, and then click
Change/Remove.
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the
problem persists after completing step
3. Mac computers do not provide an
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software.
5 Reboot your computer.
6 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your smartphone.
7 (Outlook only) If you’re trying to
synchronize offline, set your Outlook
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to
be available offline.
Outlook subfolders and public folders are
not accessible with the included software.
You may wish to use a third-party solution
instead.
TIP
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
(Outlook only) If you want to sync your
info with a global Exchange Address Book,
you must copy the addresses to your local
Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the
addresses and select Add to Personal
Address Book).
TIP
For more info on Outlook conduits,
right-click the HotSync manager icon in the
taskbar, select Custom, select an app with
Outlook in its name, and then select Help.
TIP
I have duplicate entries in Microsoft
Outlook after I sync
1 Open Microsoft Outlook and delete the
duplicate entries.
2 On your computer, go to the Outlook
application with duplicate entries and
manually enter any info you added to
your smartphone since the last time
you synchronized.
3 Right-click HotSync manager
taskbar, and select Custom.
in the
209
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
4 Select the application that has duplicate
entries and also has Outlook in its
name, such as Outlook contacts.
5 Click Change.
6 Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
7 If more than one Outlook application
has duplicate entries, then repeat steps
4 through 6 for each application with
duplicates.
8 Click Done.
9 Synchronize your smartphone and your
computer.
210
with your Treo 700P smartphone. If
you’re not sure whether this software is
installed, reinstall Palm Desktop
software from the Palm Software
Installation CD that came with your
smartphone.
2 Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the
wrong entries.
3 On your computer, manually enter any
Calendar info you added to your
smartphone since the last time
you synchronized.
4 Click HotSync manager
in the
taskbar and select Custom.
My appointments show up in the wrong
time slot after I sync
5 Select an application that has both
Calendar and Outlook in its name.
If you create an appointment in the wrong
time zone (i.e., your desktop was set to the
wrong time zone), it shows up in the wrong
time zone on your smartphone. To be safe,
enable local network time and avoid
assigning time zones to your
appointments.
6 Click Change.
7 Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
8 Synchronize your smartphone and your
computer.
If you’re using Microsoft Outlook:
9 Repeat steps 4 through 6 to open the
Calendar Change HotSync Action
dialog box.
1 Make sure that you installed the
Microsoft Outlook conduit that came
10 Select Synchronize the files, and then
click OK.
You should now be able to assign time
zones to your events without encountering
this problem.
12 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the
Calendar Change HotSync Action
dialog box.
If you’re using Palm Desktop software:
13 Select Synchronize the files, and then
click OK.
1 On your smartphone, press
Calendar .
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
4 Uncheck the New events use time
zones box (if it’s checked).
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
You should now be able to assign time
zones to your events without encountering
this problem.
IMPORTANT To avoid this problem in the
future, do not assign time zones to your
events. Palm Desktop software does not
support time zones.
5 On your computer, open Palm Desktop
software and correct the wrong entries.
6 On your computer, manually enter any
Calendar info you added to your
smartphone since the last time
you synchronized.
7 Click HotSync manager
in the
taskbar and select Custom.
8 Select Calendar.
9 Click Change.
10 Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
11 Synchronize your smartphone and your
computer.
Phone
Signal strength is weak
Become familiar with low coverage areas
where you live, commute, work, and play.
Then you will know when to expect signal
strength issues. You can check signal
strength by looking at the Signal Strength
icon in the title bar of the Main View in
the Phone application. The stronger the
signal, the more bars that appear. If you are
outside a coverage area, no bars appear.
211
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
This applies to both the speakerphone
and the earpiece.
1 If you’re standing, move about ten feet
in any direction.
2 If you’re in a building, move near a
window. Open any metal blinds.
•
Position the earpiece closer to your ear
to prevent sound leaking back to the
microphone. Keep your hand away from
the microphone hole, which is on the
bottom right side of the smartphone.
•
If you’re using the speakerphone
feature with your smartphone lying on a
flat surface, try turning the smartphone
face down (screen facing the surface).
3 If you’re in a building, move outdoors or
to a more open area.
4 If you’re outdoors, move away from
large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.
5 If you’re in a vehicle, move your Treo
smartphone so that it’s level with a
window of your vehicle.
My smartphone won’t connect to the
mobile network
1 Try the suggestions about signal
strength described in Signal strength is
weak.
2 Turn off your phone and turn it on again
(see Turning your phone on and off).
I hear my own voice echo
Ask the person on the other end of the call
to turn down the volume on his or her
phone or to hold the phone closer to his or
her ear.
My voice is too quiet on the other end
•
Be sure to place the bottom of the Treo
smartphone, or the hands-free
microphone, close to your mouth.
•
Check the Signal Strength
icon in
the title bar of the Main View in the
Phone Application. If the signal is weak
(few bars are displayed), try the
suggestions about signal strength
described in Signal strength is weak.
3 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
soft reset).
The other person hears an echo
•
212
Try decreasing the volume on your Treo
smartphone to avoid coupling or
feedback on the other person’s end.
I hear static or interference
Check the Signal Strength
icon in the
title bar of the Main View in the Phone
Application. If the signal is weak (few bars
are displayed), try the suggestions about
signal strength described in Signal strength
is weak.
cheek. Try holding the smartphone so that
your face doesn’t press against the screen.
If this is not convenient, you may want to
disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature
during active calls (see Locking your
screen).
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
My phone seems to turn off by itself
If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free
device, try the following:
•
Move your smartphone closer to the
hands-free device. Audio quality
degrades as the distance between your
smartphone and hands-free device
increases. The effective range for a
device varies between manufacturers.
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including
your body, are between the smartphone
and your hands-free device.
For best performance, keep your
Bluetooth headset and phone on the same
side of your body.
TIP
My smartphone hangs up when I hold it
to my ear
You may be accidentally pressing the
onscreen Hang Up All button with your
If a system error and reset occur, the Treo
smartphone automatically turns the phone
on if it was on before the reset. However, if
the smartphone can’t determine if your
phone was on before the reset, the phone
does not automatically turn on (see Turning
your phone on and off). If the problem
persists and you’re using third-party
applications, see Third-party applications
for additional suggestions.
My smartphone makes or answers calls
when it’s in a bag or pocket
Items in your bag or pocket may be
pressing the onscreen Answer button or
otherwise activating screen items. If this
happens, be sure to press Power/End
to turn off the screen before placing
your smartphone in a bag or pocket. You
may also want to disable the screen’s
213
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
touch-sensitive feature during incoming
calls (see Locking your screen).
Hands-free devices
Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10
meters) in optimum environmental
conditions. Performance and range may be
affected by physical obstacles, radio
interference from nearby electronic
equipment, and other factors.
To find carrying cases that can help
prevent your smartphone from making calls,
as well as other useful accessories, visit
www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo.
TIP
TIP
The voicemail icon stays on the screen
after I listen to my messages
If the voicemail icon stays in the title bar
after you listen to your messages, you can
manually clear the voicemail icon.
1 In the Phone application, press
Menu
.
I can’t make or receive calls using a
Bluetooth hands-free device
Confirm all the following:
•
The Bluetooth device is compatible with
your smartphone. Go to http://
www.palm.com/us/support/bluetooth/
treo700p_bluetooth_compatibility.html
www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-support
for a list of compatible devices.
•
Press Applications
and select
Bluetooth
. Make sure the
Bluetooth setting is On.
•
You have already formed a partnership
between your smartphone and your
hands-free device, and that the
hands-free device appears in the
Trusted Devices list. (see Connecting to
a Bluetooth hands-free device).
2 Select Options and then select Phone
Preferences.
3 Select Clear Voicemail Icon.
214
•
Your hands-free device is charged and
turned on.
•
Your Treo smartphone is within range of
the hands-free device.
If the problem persists, turn the Bluetooth
setting Off and then turn it On again. If it
still persists, create a new partnership with
the hands-free device (see Connecting to a
Bluetooth hands-free device).
For best performance, keep your
Bluetooth headset and phone on the same
side of your body.
TIP
Some features of my Bluetooth
hands-free device don’t work with my
smartphone
•
Check the Palm compatibility list at
http://www.palm.com/us/support/
bluetooth/
treo700p_bluetooth_compatibility.html
www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-support
to ensure that your device is
compatible.
•
Check the documentation that came
with your device or the manufacturer’s
website for information specific to
your device.
I hear static or interference when using
my Bluetooth hands-free device
•
Try moving your Treo smartphone closer
to the hands-free device. Audio quality
degrades as the distance between your
smartphone and hands-free device
increases. The effective range for a
device varies between manufacturers.
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including
your body, are between the smartphone
and your hands-free device.
•
If the problem persists, turn the
Bluetooth setting Off and then turn it
back On again. If it still persists, create a
new partnership with the hands-free
device (see Connecting to a Bluetooth
hands-free device).
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
Email
For troubleshooting info on the VersaMail®
application, see the User Guide for the
VersaMail Application on the Palm
Software Installation CD.
215
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
Messaging
Web
I can’t send or receive text messages
I can’t tell if data services are available
•
Make sure your phone is turned on (see
Turning your phone on and off).
•
Contact your wireless service provider
to verify that your plan includes text
messaging services, that these services
have been correctly activated, and that
they are available at your location. your
wireless service provider should be able
to tell you if messaging services have
been experiencing transmission delays.
Delays can also occur between the time
that a message is sent and the time it is
received.
•
Verify with the recipient that the
receiving device can handle text
messages.
•
If a text message arrives but does not
display an alert, perform a soft reset
(see Performing a soft reset).
When your phone is on, icons appear in the
title bar in the Main View of the Phone
application to indicate whether data
services are available and whether a data
connection is active. See What are all
those icons? for a description of the icons
that indicate that data services are
available.
If your phone is on and you do not see any
of the data icons, then data services are not
available in your current location.
TIP
My smartphone won’t connect to the
Internet
Your Treo 700P smartphone supports the
1XRTT and EVDO wireless data networks.
To connect to the Internet, you must
subscribe to and activate data services
with your wireless service provider, and
you must be in a location with data
coverage.
1 Press and hold Power/End
turn off your phone. Then press
216
to
and hold the same button to turn it back
on again.
•
Data services have been activated on
your account
2 Press Phone
and look for either the
1XRTT
or EVDO
icon in the title
bar of the Main View.
•
Data coverage is available in your
location
•
There are no data service outages in
your location
3 If you see one of these icons, you are in
a data coverage area. Try connecting to
the Internet again. If you do not see
either of these icons, press
Applications
, select Prefs
,
and continue with the following steps.
4 Select Network.
5 Select the Services pick list and select
EVDO.
6 Select Connect.
7 If the connection is successful, go the
web browser. If you still can’t make a
connection, perform a soft reset (see
Performing a soft reset).
8 If your phone did not turn on
automatically, press and hold Power/
End
to turn on your phone, and
try connecting to the Internet.
9 Contact your wireless service provider
to verify the following:
•
Your subscription plan includes
high-speed data services
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
I can’t access a web page
First, make sure you have Internet access:
Open the web browser and try to view
another web page you’ve loaded before. To
ensure you’re viewing the page directly
from the Internet, press Menu
, select
Go, and then select Refresh.
If you can view the other web page after
you refresh it, but you still can’t access the
page you were originally trying to view, the
page may contain elements that are not
supported by the web browser. These
include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript,
WMLScript, and other plug-ins.
Some websites use a redirector to their
true home page. If the web browser on
your smartphone can’t follow the
redirector, try using a desktop browser to
see the landing page of the redirector, and
217
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
then enter that address in the web browser
on your smartphone.
Your Treo smartphone can open your email
application when you select an email address
on a web page. If nothing happens when you
select the link, make sure your email
application is already set up.
TIP
It takes a long time for a web page to load
If it is taking longer than usual to load web
pages, you may have traveled from an
EVDO service area to a 1XRTT service
area. Although 1XRTT data service is
considered a high-speed data service, it
seems slow if you are used to EVDO
speed.
1 Press Phone
and look for either the
1XRTT
or EVDO
icon in the title
bar of the Main View of the Phone
application.
2 If you see the EVDO
icon, then
there may be a problem with the web
site you are trying to access. Try
opening a different web page to see if
the problem persists.
218
3 If you see the 1XRTT
icon, then you
may be experiencing the difference in
performance between the two types of
data networks.
4 To be sure there is not a problem with
your connection to your wireless
service provider’s network, press and
hold Power/End
to turn off your
phone. Then press and hold the same
button to turn it back on again.
5 Try opening the web page again to see
if it loads faster.
An image or map is too small on
my screen
The web browser has two modes:
Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized
Mode resizes all images and page
elements to fit in a single column on the
smartphone screen. Switch to Wide Page
Mode to see the full-size image (see
Viewing a web page).
You may also be able to save the image on
your smartphone or an expansion card and
then view the image later on your
computer.
A secure site refuses to permit a
transaction
Some websites don’t support certain
browsers for transactions. Please contact
the site’s webmaster to make sure the site
allows transactions using your
smartphone’s Blazer® web browser.
Camera
•
For best results, verify that you have the
brightest light source coming from
behind you, lighting the subject’s face.
Avoid taking indoor pictures with the
subject in front of a window or light.
•
Make sure the subject is at least 18
inches away from the camera to ensure
good focus.
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
When you synchronize your smartphone
with your computer, your camera images
are stored on your hard drive (see Viewing
pictures and videos on your computer).
Here are some tips for taking good pictures
with the built-in camera:
•
Clean the camera’s lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth.
•
Take pictures in bright lighting
conditions. Low-light images may be
grainy, due to the sensitivity of the
camera.
•
Hold the smartphone as still as
possible. Try supporting your
picture-taking arm against your body or
a stationary object (such as a wall).
•
Keep the subject of the picture still.
Exposure time is longer with lower light
levels, so you may see a blur.
Making room on your
Treo smartphone
Keep in mind that your smartphone
includes an expansion card slot, and that
you can store applications and information
on expansion cards (sold separately).
However, you still need free memory on
the smartphone itself to run applications
from an expansion card. For more info on
using expansion cards, see Using
expansion cards.
219
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
If you store a large number of records or
install many third-party applications, the
internal memory on your smartphone may
fill up. Here are some common ways to
clear space:
•
•
•
Email: Messages that have large
attachments can quickly consume
memory on your smartphone. Delete
messages with large attachments. If
you have hundreds of messages with or
without attachments, you may want to
delete older messages to make room
(see the User Guide for the VersaMail
Application on the Palm Software
Installation CD.)
Pics&Videos: Large images take up a
lot of memory. Move images to an
expansion card or synchronize them to
your computer, and then delete the
images from your smartphone (see
Viewing pictures and videos on your
computer and Deleting a picture or
video).
Music: Music files often consume
excessive memory. Move music files to
an expansion card, or delete large files
from your smartphone (see Transferring
MP3 files from your computer).
220
•
Internet: If you set a large web browser
cache, you may want to use the web
browser’s advanced Memory
Management settings to clear all recent
pages (see Customizing your web
browser settings).
•
Third-party applications: You can delete
infrequently used applications (see
Removing applications) or move them
to an expansion card (see Copying
applications between an expansion card
and your smartphone).
Third-party
applications
Some third-party applications can cause
conflicts on your smartphone. For example,
third-party applications that were not
written with the Treo smartphone keyboard
and 5-way navigator in mind may cause
strange behavior or errors when using the
keyboard and 5-way navigator in these
applications. Third-party applications that
modify wireless features may require extra
troubleshooting.
If you recently installed an application and
your device seems to be stuck, try the
following:
WINDOWS ONLY C:\Program
Files\Palm\device name
1 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
soft reset).
HD\Applications\Palm\Users\device
name
2 If the problem persists, perform a
system reset (see Performing a system
reset).
7 Perform a hard reset (see Performing a
hard reset).
3 Delete the most recently installed
application from your smartphone (see
Removing applications).
4 If the problem persists, perform another
system reset.
5 If possible, synchronize your
smartphone with your computer to back
up your most recent info.
6 If you’re unable to perform the
preceding steps or the problem
persists, locate your Backup subfolder
on your computer and rename the
folder (for example, BackupOld). Note
that “Palm” in the following locations
might be “Handspring” or “palmOne,”
based on the device you’re upgrading
from:
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
MAC ONLY Mac
8 Sync to restore your Calendar, Contacts,
Tasks, Memos, and Pics&Videos info.
9 If the problem is resolved, begin
reinstalling your third-party applications
one at a time by double-clicking a single
file in the original Backup subfolder that
you renamed, and sync after each
application you install.
10 If the problem recurs, delete the last
application you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
Getting more help
Contact the author or vendor of the
third-party software if you require further
assistance.
221
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
Error messages
Your Treo smartphone is designed to
minimize interruptions when a system
error occurs. If your smartphone
encounters a system error, it automatically
resets itself and resumes functioning as
normal. If possible, it even turns the phone
back on if it was on before the error
occurred.
Sometimes you might want to know more
about an error. Your Treo smartphone uses
a special interface to show error messages
in greater detail.
222
1 Press Phone
.
2 Enter #*#377, and then press Send
.
3 Review the screen with details about
the conditions that led up to the most
recent automatic reset.
4 Select OK.
Note that third-party developers create
their own error messages. If you do not
understand an error message, please
contact the developer of the application for
help.
Where to learn more
For a quick introduction
Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces you
to many of your Palm® Treo™ 700P
smartphone’s features. It is already
installed on your smartphone, and you can
open it any time. Press Applications
,
and then select Quick Tour
.
While using your Treo smartphone
On-device User Guide: A copy of this guide
is available right on your smartphone. The
on-device guide is specially formatted for
your smartphone screen. To view the
on-device guide, press Applications
,
and then select My Treo
.
Tips: Many of the built-in applications
include helpful tips for getting the most out
of your smartphone. To view these tips,
open an application, press Menu
,
select Options, and then select Tips.
Online support from Palm: For up-to-date
downloads, troubleshooting, and support
information, go to
www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-support.
If you need more information
Books: Many books on Palm OS® devices
are available in local or online book retailers
(look in the computers section), or visit
www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo.
Online forums: Consult online Treo device
user discussion groups to swap
information and learn about topics you may
find nowhere else. for details, visit
www.palm.com/treo700pcdma-mytreo.
Customer service from your wireless
service provider: For questions about your
mobile account or features, contact your
wireless service provider’s technical
support department or your wireless
service provider’s customer service and
billing department.
Information: Many screens have a Tips
icon in the upper-right corner. Select the
Tips
icon to learn about the tasks you
can perform in that dialog box.
WHERE TO LEARN MORE
223
224
WHERE TO LEARN MORE
Terms
1xRTT (single carrier [1x] radio
transmission technology)
A wireless technology that provides fast
data transfer and Internet access with
average speeds of 60 to 80Kbps and bursts
of up to 144Kbps.
Alt (alternative)
A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the
keyboard, and then press Alt
to
access variations such as international
characters and symbols.
Beam
The process of sending or receiving an
entry or application using the infrared port
on your Treo smartphone.
Bluetooth® wireless technology
Technology that enables devices such as
smartphones, mobile phones, and
computers to connect wirelessly to each
other so that they can exchange
information over short distances.
Device name
The screen on your Palm® Treo™ 700P
smartphone from which you can open all
applications.
The name associated with your Treo
smartphone that distinguishes it from
other Palm OS® devices. When you first
synchronize your smartphone, you are
asked to give it a device name. This name
appears in the User list in Palm Desktop
software.
Auto-off interval
Dialog box
The time of inactivity that passes before
the screen on your smartphone turns off.
The wireless features on your smartphone
are unaffected by this setting.
A set of options and command buttons that
is enclosed by a border and that enables
you to carry out a specific task.
Applications
EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized)
A wireless broadband technology that is
designed for very high speed data transfer
with average download speeds of 400 to
TERMS
225
700Kbps. It is capable of reaching
download speeds of up to 1.8Mbps and
upload speeds of up to 156Kbps.
Lithium Ion (Li-Ion)
Favorite
Option key
A button that provides quick access to a
phone number (speed dial) or commonly
used application (such as Contacts, Web,
Messaging). You can define up to 70
favorite buttons in the Phone application.
The keyboard button that enables you to
access the alternative feature that appears
above the letter on each key.
HotSync®
The technology that synchronizes your
smartphone and your computer with the
simple press of a button.
HotSync manager
The computer application that manages the
synchronization of your Treo smartphone
with your computer.
Infrared (IR)
A way of transmitting information using
light waves. The IR port on your Treo
smartphone enables you to transfer
information to other IR devices within a
short radius.
226
TERMS
The rechargeable battery technology used
in Treo smartphones.
Palm® Desktop software
A PIM application for computers that helps
you manage your personal information and
keep your personal information
synchronized with your Treo smartphone.
Palm OS®
The operating system of your Treo 700P
smartphone. Palm OS is known for its
simplicity of use and for the large number
of compatible third-party applications that
can be added to your Treo 700P
smartphone.
Palm® Quick Install
The component on your Windows
computer that enables you to install Palm
OS applications and other information on
your Treo smartphone.
Partnership
Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your
smartphone and a hands-free device—that
can connect because each device finds the
same passkey on the other device. Once
you form a partnership with a device, you
don’t need to enter a passkey to connect
with that device. Partnership is also known
as paired relationship, pairing, Trusted
Device, and Trusted Pair on some devices.
Phone
The application on your Treo smartphone
that enables you to make and receive
phone calls.
are typically exchanged between mobile
phones. These messages can usually
include up to 160 characters; messages
with more than 160 characters are
automatically split into several messages.
Treo smartphones can send and receive
SMS messages while you are on a voice
call.
Streaming
Technology that enables you to access
media content—for example, watch video
or listen to an audio program—directly
from the Internet on your smartphone
without needing to download a file to save
on your smartphone.
PIM (personal information manager)
A genre of software that includes
applications such as Palm Desktop
software, Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes,
and ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts,
schedules, tasks, and memos.
User folder
The folder on your computer that contains
the information you enter in Palm Desktop
software and the information you enter on
your smartphone and synchronize with
Palm Desktop software.
SMS (Short Messaging Service)
The service that exchanges short text
messages almost instantly. Text messages
TERMS
227
228
TERMS
Important safety and
legal information
FCC Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna
modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate
FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
FCC RF Safety Statement
In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users
MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories.
•
A Palm™ brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for
SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product.
•
An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and
provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body
and the unit.
Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact
with the body (i.e., on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will
likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits See www.fcc.gov/oet/
rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure safety.
Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) for Wireless
Smartphones
The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF
energy absorbed in the head of a user of a wireless handset.
The SAR value of a smartphone is the result of an extensive testing,
measuring and calculation process. It does not represent how much
RF the smartphone emits. All smartphone models are tested at their
highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in operation, the
SAR of a smartphone can be substantially less than the level reported
to the FCC. This is because of a variety of factors including its
proximity to a base station antenna, smartphone design and other
factors. What is important to remember is that each smartphone
meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs do not represent a
variation in safety.
All smartphones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates
a substantial margin of safety. As stated above, variations in SAR
values between different model smartphones do not mean variations
in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are
considered safe for use by the public.
The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Palm® Treo™ 700P
smartphone, by Palm are:
Maximum SAR
Values
EVDO Cellular
EVDO PCS
Held to Ear
1.48 (W/Kg)
1.13 (W/Kg)
Body - Worn
0.896 (W/Kg)
0.589 (W/Kg)
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
229
FCC Radiofrequency Emission
This smartphone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission
Guidelines and is certified with the FCC as.
FCC ID number: O8FJIMI.
More information on the smartphone's SAR can be found from the
following FCC Website:
https://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/prod/oet/cf/eas/reports/GenericSearch.cfm.
(The following information comes from a consumer information
Website jointly sponsored by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
(FDA) and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC), entitled
“Cell Smartphone Facts: Consumer Information on Wireless
Smartphones.” The information reproduced herein is dated July 29,
2003. For further updates, please visit the Website:
http://www.fda.gov/cellphones/qa.html.)
What is radiofrequency energy (RF)? Radiofrequency energy (RF)
is another name for radio waves. It is one form of electromagnetic
energy that makes up the electromagnetic spectrum. Some of the
other forms of energy in the electromagnetic spectrum are gamma
rays, x-rays and light. Electromagnetic energy (or electromagnetic
radiation) consists of waves of electric and magnetic energy moving
together (radiating) through space. The area where these waves are
found is called an electromagnetic field.
Radio waves are created due to the movement of electrical charges in
antennas. As they are created, these waves radiate away from the
antenna. All electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light. The
major differences between the different types of waves are the
distances covered by one cycle of the wave and the number of waves
that pass a certain point during a set time period. The wavelength is
the distance covered by one cycle of a wave. The frequency is the
number of waves passing a given point in one second. For any
electromagnetic wave, the wavelength multiplied by the frequency
equals the speed of light. The frequency of an RF signal is usually
expressed in units called hertz (Hz). One Hz equals one wave per
second. One kilohertz (kHz) equals one thousand waves per second,
one megahertz (MHz) equals one million waves per second, and one
gigahertz (GHz) equals one billion waves per second.
230
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
RF energy includes waves with frequencies ranging from about 3000
waves per second (3 kHz) to 300 billion waves per second (300 GHz).
Microwaves are a subset of radio waves that have frequencies
ranging from around 300 million waves per second (300 MHz) to
three billion waves per second (3 GHz).
How is radiofrequency energy used? Probably the most important
use of RF energy is for telecommunications. Radio and TV
broadcasting, wireless smartphones, pagers, cordless smartphones,
police and fire department radios, point-to-point links and satellite
communications all rely on RF energy.
Other uses of RF energy include microwave ovens, radar, industrial
heaters and sealers, and medical treatments. RF energy, especially at
microwave frequencies, can heat water. Since most food has a high
water content, microwaves can cook food quickly. Radar relies on RF
energy to track cars and airplanes as well as for military applications.
Industrial heaters and sealers use RF energy to mold plastic
materials, glue wood products, seal leather items such as shoes and
pocketbooks, and process food. Medical uses of RF energy include
pacemaker monitoring and programming.
How is radiofrequency radiation measured? RF waves and RF
fields have both electrical and magnetic components. It is often
convenient to express the strength of the RF field in terms of each
component. For example, the unit “volts per meter” (V/m) is used to
measure the electric field strength, and the unit “amperes per
meter” (A/m) is used to express the magnetic field strength. Another
common way to characterize an RF field is by means of the power
density. Power density is defined as power per unit area. For
example, power density can be expressed in terms of milliwatts (one
thousandth of a watt) per square centimeter (mW/cm2) or microwatts
(one millionth of a watt) per square centimeter (µW/cm2).
The quantity used to measure how much RF energy is actually
absorbed by the body is called the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR.
The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy. It is
usually expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg) or milliwatts
per gram (mW/g).
What biological effects can be caused by RF energy?
The biological effects of radiofrequency energy should not be
confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic
energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in X-rays
and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a process
where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in
atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage biological tissues
including DNA, the genetic material. Ionization only occurs with very
high levels of electromagnetic energy such as X-rays and gamma
rays. Often the term radiation is used when discussing ionizing
radiation (such as that associated with nuclear power plants).
The FCC guidelines for human exposure to RF electromagnetic fields
are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations,
the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements
(NCRP) and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed by
scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry, government,
and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature
related to the biological effects of RF energy.
The energy levels associated with radiofrequency energy, including
both radio waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause the
ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of
non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-ionizing radiation include
visible light, infrared radiation (heat) and other forms of
electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies.
Many countries in Europe and elsewhere use exposure guidelines
developed by the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection (ICNIRP). The ICNIRP safety limits are generally similar to
those of the NCRP and IEEE, with a few exceptions. For example,
ICNIRP recommends different exposure levels in the lower and upper
frequency ranges and for localized exposure from certain products
such as hand-held wireless telephones. Currently, the World Health
Organization is working to provide a framework for international
harmonization of RF safety standards.
Large amounts of RF energy can heat tissue. This can damage
tissues and increase body temperatures. Two areas of the body, the
eyes and the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because
there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.
The amount of RF radiation routinely encountered by the general
public is too low to produce significant heating or increased body
temperature. Still, some people have questions about the possible
health effects of low levels of RF energy. It is generally agreed that
further research is needed to determine what effects actually occur
and whether they are dangerous to people. In the meantime,
standards-setting organizations and government agencies are
continuing to monitor the latest scientific findings to determine
whether changes in safety limits are needed to protect human health.
FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public
health and safety have worked together and in connection with WHO
to monitor developments and identify research needs related to RF
biological effects.
What levels of RF energy are considered safe? Various
organizations and countries have developed standards for exposure
to radiofrequency energy. These standards recommend safe levels of
exposure for both the general public and for workers. In the United
States, the FCC has used safety guidelines for RF environmental
exposure since 1985.
The NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP all have identified a whole-body Specific
Absorption Rate (SAR) value of 4 watts per kilogram (4 W/kg) as a
threshold level of exposure at which harmful biological effects may
occur. Exposure guidelines in terms of field strength, power density
and localized SAR were then derived from this threshold value. In
addition, the NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP guidelines vary depending on
the frequency of the RF exposure. This is due to the finding that
whole-body human absorption of RF energy varies with the
frequency of the RF signal. The most restrictive limits on whole-body
exposure are in the frequency range of 30-300 MHz where the
human body absorbs RF energy most efficiently. For products that
only expose part of the body, such as wireless smartphones,
exposure limits in terms of SAR only are specified.
The exposure limits used by the FCC are expressed in terms of SAR,
electric and magnetic field strength, and power density for
transmitters operating at frequencies from 300 kHz to 100 GHz. The
specific values can be found in two FCC bulletins, OET Bulletins 56
and 65: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#56; http://
www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#65.
Why has the FCC adopted guidelines for RF exposure? The FCC
authorizes and licenses products, transmitters, and facilities that
generate RF and microwave radiation. It has jurisdiction over all
transmitting services in the U.S. except those specifically operated by
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
231
the Federal Government. While the FCC does not have the expertise
to determine radiation exposure guidelines on its own, it does have
the expertise and authority to recognize and adopt technically sound
standards promulgated by other expert agencies and organizations,
and has done so. (Our joint efforts with the FDA in developing this
website is illustrative of the kind of inter-agency efforts and
consultation we engage in regarding this health and safety issue.)
Under the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA), the FCC
has certain responsibilities to consider whether its actions will
significantly affect the quality of the human environment. Therefore,
FCC approval and licensing of transmitters and facilities must be
evaluated for significant impact on the environment. Human
exposure to RF radiation emitted by FCC-regulated transmitters is
one of several factors that must be considered in such environmental
evaluations. In 1996, the FCC revised its guidelines for RF exposure
as a result of a multi-year proceeding and as required by the
Telecommunications Act of 1996.
Radio and television broadcast stations, satellite-earth stations,
experimental radio stations and certain wireless communication
facilities are required to undergo routine evaluation for RF compliance
when they submit an application to the FCC for construction or
modification of a transmitting facility or renewal of a license. Failure
to comply with the FCC's RF exposure guidelines could lead to the
preparation of a formal Environmental Assessment, possible
Environmental Impact Statement and eventual rejection of an
application. Technical guidelines for evaluating compliance with the
FCC.
RF safety requirements can be found in the FCC's OET Bulletin 65:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#65.
Low-powered, intermittent, or inaccessible RF transmitters and
facilities are normally excluded from the requirement for routine
evaluation for RF exposure. These exclusions are based on standard
calculations and measurement data indicating that a transmitting
station or equipment operating under the conditions prescribed is
unlikely to cause exposures in excess of the guidelines under normal
conditions of use. Such exclusions are not exclusions from
compliance, but, rather, exclusions from routine evaluation. The
FCC's policies on RF exposure and categorical exclusion can be found
in Section 1.1307(b) of the FCC's Rules and Regulations [(47 CFR
1.1307(b)].
232
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
How can I obtain the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) value for
my wireless smartphone? The FCC requires that wireless
smartphones sold in the United States demonstrate compliance with
human exposure limits adopted by the FCC in 1996. The relative
amount of RF energy absorbed in the head of a wireless
telephone-user is given by the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), as
explained above. The FCC requires wireless smartphones to comply
with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg) in terms of
SAR.
Information on SAR for a specific smartphone model can be obtained
for many recently manufactured smartphones using the FCC
identification (ID) number for that model. The FCC ID number is
usually printed somewhere on the case of the smartphone.
Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find
the number. Once you have the ID number, go to the following Web
address: www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid. On this page, you will see
instructions for entering the FCC ID number. Type the FCC ID number
exactly as requested (the Grantee Code is the first three characters,
the Equipment Product Code is the rest of the FCC ID number). Then
click on “Start Search.” The “Grant of Equipment Authorization” for
your telephone should appear. Read through the grant for the section
on “SAR Compliance,” “Certification of Compliance with FCC Rules
for RF Exposure” or similar language. This section should contain the
value(s) for typical or maximum SAR for your smartphone.
Smartphones and other products authorized since June 2, 2000,
should have the maximum SAR levels noted directly on the “Grant of
Equipment Authorization.” For smartphones and products authorized
between about mid-1998 and June 2000, detailed information on
SAR levels is typically found in the exhibits associated with the grant.
Once a grant is accessed, the exhibits can be viewed by clicking on
“View Exhibit.” Grants authorized prior to 1998 are not part of the
electronic database but, rather, have been documented in the form of
paper records.
The FCC database does not list smartphones by model number.
However, consumers may find SAR information from other sources
as well. Some wireless smartphone manufacturers make SAR
information available on their own Web sites. In addition, some
non-government websites provide SARs for specific models of
wireless smartphones. However, the FCC has not reviewed these
sites and makes no guarantees of their accuracy. Finally,
smartphones certified by the Cellular Telecommunications and
Internet Association (CTIA) are required to provide SAR information to
consumers in the instructional materials that come with the
smartphones.
consist of antennas and electronic equipment. Because the antennas
need to be high in the air, they are often located on towers, poles,
water tanks, or rooftops. Typical heights for freestanding base station
towers are 50-200 feet.
Do hands-free kits for wireless smartphones reduce risks from
exposure to RF emissions? Since there are no known risks from
exposure to RF emissions from wireless smartphones, there is no
reason to believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits
can be used with wireless smartphones for convenience and
comfort. These systems reduce the absorption of RF energy in the
head because the smartphone, which is the source of the RF
emissions, will not be placed against the head. On the other hand, if
the smartphone is mounted against the waist or other part of the
body during use, then that part of the body will absorb more RF
energy. Wireless smartphones marketed in the U.S. are required to
meet safety requirements regardless of whether they are used
against the head or against the body. Either configuration should
result in compliance with the safety limit.
Some base stations use antennas that look like poles, 10 to 15 feet in
length, that are referred to as “omni-directional” antennas. These
types of antennas are usually found in rural areas. In urban and
suburban areas, wireless providers now more commonly use panel
or sector antennas for their base stations. These antennas consist of
rectangular panels, about 1 by 4 feet in dimension. The antennas are
usually arranged in three groups of three antennas each. One
antenna in each group is used to transmit signals to wireless
smartphones, and the other two antennas in each group are used to
receive signals from wireless smartphones.
Do wireless smartphone accessories that claim to shield the
head from RF radiation work? Since there are no known risks from
exposure to RF emissions from wireless smartphones, there is no
reason to believe that accessories that claim to shield the head from
those emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield the
user from RF absorption use special smartphone cases, while others
involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the
smartphone. Studies have shown that these products generally do
not work as advertised. Unlike “hand-free” kits, these so-called
“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the smartphone.
The smartphone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,
leading to an increase in RF absorption. In February 2002, the Federal
trade Commission (FTC) charged two companies that sold devices
that claimed to protect wireless smartphone users from radiation
with making false and unsubstantiated claims. According to FTC,
these defendants lacked a reasonable basis to substantiate their
claim.
What are wireless telephone base stations? Fixed antennas used
for wireless telecommunications are referred to as cellular base
stations, cell stations, PCS (“Personal Communications Service”)
stations or telephone transmission towers. These base stations
At any base station site, the amount of RF energy produced depends
on the number of radio channels (transmitters) per antenna and the
power of each transmitter. Typically, 21 channels per antenna sector
are available. For a typical cell site using sector antennas, each of the
three transmitting antennas could be connected to up to 21
transmitters for a total of 63 transmitters. However, it is unlikely that
all of the transmitters would be transmitting at the same time. When
omni-directional antennas are used, a cellular base station could
theoretically use up to 96 transmitters, but this would be very
unusual, and, once again, it is unlikely that all transmitters would be in
operation simultaneously. Base stations used for PCS
communications generally require fewer transmitters than those
used for cellular radio transmissions, since PCS carriers usually have
a higher density of base station antenna sites.
Are wireless telephone base stations safe? The electromagnetic
RF signals transmitted from base station antennas stations travel
toward the horizon in relatively narrow paths. For example, the
radiation pattern for an antenna array mounted on a tower can be
likened to a thin pancake centered around the antenna system. The
individual pattern for a single array of sector antennas is
wedge-shaped, like a piece of pie. As with all forms of
electromagnetic energy, the power decreases rapidly as one moves
away from the antenna. Therefore, RF exposure on the ground is
much less than exposure very close to the antenna and in the path of
the transmitted radio signal. In fact, ground-level exposure from such
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
233
antennas is typically thousands of times less than the exposure levels
recommended as safe by expert organizations. So exposure to
nearby residents would be well within safety margins.
Cellular and PCS base stations in the United States are required to
comply with limits for exposure recommended by expert
organizations and endorsed by government agencies responsible for
health and safety. Measurements made near cellular and PCS base
station antennas mounted on towers have confirmed that
ground-level exposures are typically thousands of times less than the
exposure limits adopted by the FCC. In fact, in order to be exposed to
levels at or near the FCC limits for cellular or PCS frequencies an
individual would essentially have to remain in the main transmitted
radio signal (at the height of the antenna) and within a few feet from
the antenna. This is, of course, very unlikely to occur.
When cellular and PCS antennas are mounted on rooftops, RF levels
on that roof or on others near by would probably be greater than those
typically encountered on the ground. However, exposure levels
approaching or exceeding safety guidelines should be encountered
only very close to or directly in front of the antennas. In addition, for
sector-type antennas, typically used for such rooftop base stations, RF
levels to the side and in back of these antennas are insignificant.
General guidelines on antenna installations and circumstances that
might give rise to a concern about a facility's conformance with FCC
regulations can be found in A Local Government Official's Guide to
Transmitting Antenna RF Emission Safety: Rules, Procedures, and
Practical Guidance. This Guide can be accessed at: http://
www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety.
Who regulates exposure to radiation from microwave ovens,
television sets and computer monitors? The Food and Drug
Administration is responsible for protecting the public from harmful
radiation emissions from these consumer products.
Does the FCC routinely monitor radiofrequency radiation from
antennas? The FCC does not have the resources or the personnel to
routinely monitor the emissions for all the thousands of transmitters
that are subject to FCC jurisdiction. However, the FCC does have
measurement instrumentation for evaluating RF levels in areas that
may be accessible to the public or to workers. If there is evidence for
potential non-compliance with FCC exposure guidelines for a
FCC-regulated facility, staff from the FCC's Office of Engineering and
Technology or the FCC Enforcement Bureau can conduct an
234
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
investigation, and, if appropriate, perform actual measurements.
Circumstances that could give rise to a concern about a facility's
conformance with FCC regulations can be found in A Local
Government Official's Guide to Transmitting Antenna RF Emission
Safety: Rules, Procedures, and Practical Guidance. This Guide can be
accessed at: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety. Potential exposure
problems should be brought to the FCC's attention by contacting the
FCC RF Safety Program at: 202-418-2464 or by email:
rfsafety@fcc.gov.
Does the FCC maintain a database that includes information on
the location and technical parameters of all the transmitting
towers it regulates? Each of the FCC Bureaus maintains its own
licensing database system for the service(s) it regulates (e.g.,
television, cellular service, satellite earth stations.) The FCC issues
two types of licenses: site specific and market based. In the case of
site specific licensed facilities, technical operating information is
collected from the licensee as part of the licensing process. However,
in the case of market based licensing (e.g., PCS, cellular), the
licensee is granted the authority to operate a radio communications
system in a geographic area using as many facilities as are required,
and the licensee is not required to provide the FCC with specific
location and operating parameters of these facilities.
Information on site specific licensed facilities can be found in the
“General Menu Reports” (GenMen) at http://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/cgi-bin/
ws.exe/genmen/index.hts.
The various FCC Bureaus also publish on at least a weekly basis, bulk
extracts of their licensing databases. Each licensing database has its
own unique file structure. These extracts consist of multiple, very
large files. The FCC's Office of Engineering and Technology (OET)
maintains an index to these databases at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/
database/fadb.html. Entry points into the various databases include
frequency, state/county, latitude/longitude, call-sign and licensee
name. For further information on the Commission's existing
databases, you can contact Donald Campbell at dcampbel@fcc.gov or
202-418-2405.
Can local and state governmental bodies establish limits for RF
exposure? Although some local and state governments have
enacted rules and regulations about human exposure to RF energy in
the past, the Telecommunications Act of 1996 requires the Federal
Government to control human exposure to RF emissions. In
particular, Section 704 of the Act states that, “No State or local
government or instrumentality thereof may regulate the placement,
construction, and modification of personal wireless service facilities
on the basis of the environmental effects of radio frequency
emissions to the extent that such facilities comply with the
Commission's regulations concerning such emissions.” Further
information on federal authority and FCC policy is available in a fact
sheet from the FCC's Wireless Telecommunications Bureau at
www.fcc.gov/wtb.
Do wireless smartphones pose a health hazard? The available
scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are
associated with using wireless smartphones. There is no proof,
however, that wireless smartphones are absolutely safe. Wireless
smartphones emit low levels of radiofrequency energy (RF) in the
microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of
RF when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can
produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF
that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse
health effects. Many studies of low level RF exposures have not
found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some
biological effects may occur, but such findings have not been
confirmed by additional research. In some cases, other researchers
have had difficulty in reproducing those studies, or in determining the
reasons for inconsistent results.
What is FDA's role concerning the safety of wireless
smartphones? Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of
radiation-emitting consumer products such as wireless smartphones
before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical
devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if wireless
smartphones are shown to emit radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level
that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the
manufacturers of wireless smartphones to notify users of the health
hazard and to repair, replace or recall the smartphones so that the
hazard no longer exists.
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory
actions, FDA has urged the wireless smartphone industry to take a
number of steps, including the following:
•
Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of
the type emitted by wireless smartphones;
•
Design wireless smartphones in a way that minimizes any RF
exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function;
and
•
Cooperate in providing users of wireless smartphones with the
best possible information on possible effects of wireless
smartphone use on human health
FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies
that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure
coordinated efforts at the federal level. The following agencies belong
to this working group:
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Environmental Protection Agency
Federal Communications Commission
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
National Telecommunications and Information Administration
The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency
working group activities, as well.
FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless smartphones with
the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). All smartphones
that are sold in the United States must comply with FCC safety
guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies on FDA and other health
agencies for safety questions about wireless smartphones.
FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless smartphone
networks rely upon. While these base stations operate at higher
power than do the wireless smartphones themselves, the RF
exposures that people get from these base stations are typically
thousands of times lower than those they can get from wireless
smartphones. Base stations are thus not the primary subject of the
safety questions discussed in this document.
What kinds of smartphones are the subject of this update? The
term “wireless smartphone” refers here to hand-held wireless
smartphones with built-in antennas, often called “cell,” “mobile,” or
“PCS” smartphones. These types of wireless smartphones can
expose the user to measurable radiofrequency energy (RF) because
of the short distance between the smartphone and the user's head.
These RF exposures are limited by Federal Communications
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
235
Commission safety guidelines that were developed with the advice
of FDA and other federal health and safety agencies. When the
smartphone is located at greater distances from the user, the
exposure to RF is drastically lower because a person's RF exposure
decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the source. The
so-called “cordless smartphones,” which have a base unit connected
to the telephone wiring in a house, typically operate at far lower
power levels, and thus produce RF exposures well within the FCC's
compliance limits.
What are the results of the research done already? The research
done thus far has produced conflicting results, and many studies
have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal
experiments investigating the effects of radiofrequency energy (RF)
exposures characteristic of wireless smartphones have yielded
conflicting results that often cannot be repeated in other laboratories.
A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF
could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals.
However, many of the studies that showed increased tumor
development used animals that had been genetically engineered or
treated with cancer-causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to
develop cancer in the absence of RF exposure. Other studies
exposed the animals to RF for up to 22 hours per day. These
conditions are not similar to the conditions under which people use
wireless smartphones, so we don't know with certainty what the
results of such studies mean for human health.
Three large epidemiology studies have been published since
December 2000. Between them, the studies investigated any
possible association between the use of wireless smartphones and
primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or acoustic neuroma,
tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other cancers.
None of the studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful
health effects from wireless smartphone RF exposures. However,
none of the studies can answer questions about long-term
exposures, since the average period of smartphone use in these
studies was around three years.
What research is needed to decide whether RF exposure from
wireless smartphones poses a health risk? A combination of
laboratory studies and epidemiological studies of people actually
using wireless smartphones would provide some of the data that are
needed. Lifetime animal exposure studies could be completed in a
236
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
few years. However, very large numbers of animals would be needed
to provide reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one exists.
Epidemiological studies can provide data that is directly applicable to
human populations, but 10 or more years' follow-up may be needed
to provide answers about some health effects, such as cancer. This is
because the interval between the time of exposure to a
cancer-causing agent and the time tumors develop - if they do - may
be many, many years. The interpretation of epidemiological studies is
hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF exposure during
day-to-day use of wireless smartphones. Many factors affect this
measurement, such as the angle at which the smartphone is held, or
which model of smartphone is used.
What is FDA doing to find out more about the possible health
effects of wireless smartphone RF? FDA is working with the U.S.
National Toxicology Program and with groups of investigators around
the world to ensure that high priority animal studies are conducted to
address important questions about the effects of exposure to
radiofrequency energy (RF).
FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization
International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception
in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the development
of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven the
establishment of new research programs around the world. The
Project has also helped develop a series of public information
documents on EMF issues.
FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association
(CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development
Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless smartphone safety.
FDA provides the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts in
government, industry, and academic organizations. CTIA-funded
research is conducted through contracts to independent
investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory studies
and studies of wireless smartphone users. The CRADA will also
include a broad assessment of additional research needs in the
context of the latest research developments around the world.
What steps can I take to reduce my exposure to radiofrequency
energy from my wireless smartphone? If there is a risk from these
products--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is probably
very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential
risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your exposure to
radiofrequency energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much
exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using
a wireless smartphone will reduce RF exposure.
If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless smartphone
every day, you could place more distance between your body and the
source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with
distance. For example, you could use a headset and carry the
wireless smartphone away from your body or use a wireless
smartphone connected to a remote antenna.
Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless
smartphones are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF
exposure from these products, you can use measures like those
described above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless
smartphone use.
What about children using wireless smartphones? The scientific
evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless smartphones,
including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower
exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures described
above would apply to children and teenagers using wireless
smartphones. Reducing the time of wireless smartphone use and
increasing the distance between the user and the RF source will
reduce RF exposure.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised
that children be discouraged from using wireless smartphones at all.
For example, the government in the United Kingdom distributed
leaflets containing such a recommendation in December 2000. They
noted that no evidence exists that using a wireless smartphone
causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit
wireless smartphone use by children was strictly precautionary; it
was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
What about wireless smartphone interference with medical
equipment? Radiofrequency energy (RF) from wireless
smartphones can interact with some electronic devices. For this
reason, FDA helped develop a detailed test method to measure
electromagnetic interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac pacemakers
and defibrillators from wireless telephones. This test method is now
part of a standard sponsored by the Association for the Advancement
of Medical instrumentation (AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by
FDA, medical device manufacturers, and many other groups, was
completed in late 2000. This standard will allow manufacturers to
ensure that cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from
wireless smartphone EMI.
FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless
smartphones and helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by
the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). This
standard specifies test methods and performance requirements for
hearing aids and wireless smartphones so that no interference occurs
when a person uses a “compatible” smartphone and a “compatible”
hearing aid at the same time. This standard was approved by the
IEEE in 2000.
FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless smartphones for
possible interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful
interference be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to assess
the interference and work to resolve the problem.
Which other federal agencies have responsibilities related to
potential RF health effects? Certain agencies in the Federal
Government have been involved in monitoring, researching or
regulating issues related to human exposure to RF radiation. These
agencies include the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA), the National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH), the National Telecommunications and
Information Administration (NTIA) and the Department of Defense
(DOD).
By authority of the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of
1968, the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the
FDA develops performance standards for the emission of radiation
from electronic products including X-ray equipment, other medical
devices, television sets, microwave ovens, laser products and
sunlamps. The CDRH established a product performance standard for
microwave ovens in 1971 limiting the amount of RF leakage from
ovens. However, the CDRH has not adopted performance standards
for other RF-emitting products. The FDA is, however, the lead federal
health agency in monitoring the latest research developments and
advising other agencies with respect to the safety of RF-emitting
products used by the public, such as cellular and PCS smartphones.
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
237
The FDA's microwave oven standard is an emission standard (as
opposed to an exposure standard) that allows specific levels of
microwave leakage (measured at five centimeters from the oven
surface). The standard also requires ovens to have two independent
interlock systems that prevent the oven from generating microwaves
the moment that the latch is released or the door of the oven is
opened. The FDA has stated that ovens that meet its standards and are
used according to the manufacturer's recommendations are safe for
consumer and industrial use. More information is available from:
www.fda.gov/cdrh.
The EPA has, in the past, considered developing federal guidelines for
public exposure to RF radiation. However, EPA activities related to RF
safety and health are presently limited to advisory functions. For
example, the EPA now chairs an Inter-agency Radiofrequency
Working Group, which coordinates RF health-related activities among
the various federal agencies with health or regulatory responsibilities
in this area.
OSHA is responsible for protecting workers from exposure to
hazardous chemical and physical agents. In 1971, OSHA issued a
protection guide for exposure of workers to RF radiation [29 CFR
1910.97]. However, this guide was later ruled to be only advisory and
not mandatory. Moreover, it was based on an earlier RF exposure
standard that has now been revised. At the present time, OSHA uses
the IEEE and/or FCC exposure guidelines for enforcement purposes
under OSHA's “general duty clause” (for more information see:
http://www.osha-slc.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html.
NIOSH is part of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services.
It conducts research and investigations into issues related to
occupational exposure to chemical and physical agents. NIOSH has,
in the past, undertaken to develop RF exposure guidelines for
workers, but final guidelines were never adopted by the agency.
NIOSH conducts safety-related RF studies through its Physical
Agents Effects Branch in Cincinnati, Ohio.
The NTIA is an agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce and is
responsible for authorizing Federal Government use of the RF
electromagnetic spectrum. Like the FCC, the NTIA also has NEPA
responsibilities and has considered adopting guidelines for evaluating
RF exposure from U.S. Government transmitters such as radar and
military facilities.
238
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
The Department of Defense (DOD) has conducted research on the
biological effects of RF energy for a number of years. This research is
now conducted primarily at the U.S. Air Force Research Laboratory
located at Brooks Air Force Base, Texas. The DOD Web site for RF
biological effects information is listed with other sites in conjunction
with a question on other sources of information, below.
Who funds and carries out research on the biological effects of
RF energy? Research into possible biological effects of RF energy is
carried out in laboratories in the United States and around the world.
In the U.S., most research has been funded by the Department of
Defense, due to the extensive military use of RF equipment such as
radar and high-powered radio transmitters. In addition, some federal
agencies responsible for health and safety, such as the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
(FDA), have sponsored and conducted research in this area. At the
present time, most of the non-military research on biological effects
of RF energy in the U.S. is being funded by industry organizations.
More research is being carried out overseas, particularly in Europe.
In 1996, the World Health Organization (WHO) established the
International EMF Project to review the scientific literature and work
towards resolution of health concerns over the use of RF technology.
WHO maintains a Web site that provides extensive information on
this project and about RF biological effects and research
(www.who.ch/peh-emf).
FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public
health and safety have worked together and in connection with WHO
to monitor developments and identify research needs related to RF
biological effects.
How does FCC Audit Cell Smartphone RF? After FCC grants
permission for a particular cellular telephone to be marketed, FCC will
occasionally conduct “post-grant” testing to determine whether
production versions of the smartphone are being produced to
conform with FCC regulatory requirements. The manufacturer of a
cell smartphone that does not meet FCC's regulatory requirements
may be required to remove the cell smartphone from use and to
refund the purchase price or provide a replacement smartphone, and
may be subject to civil or criminal penalties. In addition, if the cell
smartphone presents a risk of injury to the user, FDA may also take
regulatory action. The most important post-grant test, from a
consumer's perspective, is testing of the RF emissions of the
smartphone. FCC measures the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of
the smartphone, following a very rigorous testing protocol. As is true
for nearly any scientific measurement, there is a possibility that the
test measurement may be less than or greater than the actual RF
emitted by the smartphone. This difference between the RF test
measurement and actual RF emission is because test measurements
are limited by instrument accuracy, because test measurement and
actual use environments are different, and other variable factors. This
inherent variability is known as “measurement uncertainty.” When
FCC conducts post-grant testing of a cell smartphone, FCC takes into
account any measurement uncertainty to when determining whether
regulatory action is appropriate. This approach ensures that
when FCC takes regulatory action, it will have a sound, defensible
scientific basis.
FDA scientific staff reviewed the methodology used by FCC to
measure cell smartphone RF, and agreed it is an acceptable approach,
given our current understanding of the risks presented by cellular
smartphone RF emissions. RF emissions from cellular smartphones
have not been shown to present a risk of injury to the user when the
measured SAR is less than the safety limits set by FCC (an SAR of 1.6
w/kg). Even in a case where the maximum measurement uncertainty
permitted by current measurement standards was added to the
maximum permissible SAR, the resulting SAR value would be well
below any level known to produce an acute effect. Consequently,
FCC's approach with measurement uncertainty will not result in
consumers being exposed to any known risk from the RF emitted by
cellular telephones.
FDA will continue to monitor studies and literature reports concerning
acute effects of cell smartphone RF, and concerning chronic effects of
long-term exposure to cellular telephone RF (that is, the risks from
using a cell smartphone for many years). If new information leads
FDA to believe that a change to FCC's measurement policy may be
appropriate, FDA will contact FCC and both agencies will work
together to develop a mutually-acceptable approach.
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility Your Treosmartphone is compliant
with the FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) requirements. For
additional HAC information, including the HAC rating of this product,
please refer to www.palm.com/treoHAC.
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Palm® Device
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices
if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such
an occurrence.
Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused
by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To
most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than
annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing
your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock—
the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little
shock discharges the built-up static electricity.
ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm
circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to
help protect your electronic devices, including your Palm® device,
from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections against ESD into its
products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could
build up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic
device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything
from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD.
Devices that you carry with you, such as your smartphone, build up
ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built
up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when
the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a
discharge event can occur.
Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up static
electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching
an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The
recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before
connecting your device to your computer, placing the device in a
cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many
ways, including the following:
•
Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by
simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.
For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged
into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case
should discharge the ESD on your body.
•
Increase the relative humidity of your environment.
•
Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
239
Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can
contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment
include the following:
•
Low relative humidity.
•
Material type. (The type of material gathering the charge. For
example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural
fibers like cotton.)
•
The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect
electronic devices.
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge
static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD
events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your
electronic equipment against ESD.
Precaution against hearing loss Protect your hearing. Listening to
this device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your
hearing.
A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut
endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez notre site web
www.palm.com/fr pour plus d'informations.
Conseils d'utilisation pour réduire le niveau d'exposition aux
rayonnements: Utiliser le plus souvent possible les kits piétons
(oreillettes), notamment en cas d'usage fréquent ou prolongé du
téléphone mobile Ils apportent en outre un plus grand confort
d’utilisation.
Eloigner le téléphone mobile de certaines zones sensibles telles que
le ventre chez les femmes enceintes ou le bas-ventre chez les
adolescents, plus particulièrement lors d’une communication.
Utiliser votre téléphone mobile dans de bonnes conditions de
réception. Celle-ci est indiquée sur l’écran de votre téléphone par la
matérialisation de barrettes. 3 ou 4 barrettes, la réception est de
bonne qualité pour passer vos communications. Ce n'est pas
toujours le cas dans certaines zones ou situations, notamment les
parking souterrains, les ascenseurs, en train ou en voiture ou tout
simplement dans un secteur mal couvert par le réseau.
Mesures touchant à la sécurité: Dans certains lieux ou situations,
tels que les avions, les hôpitaux, les stations-service et les garages
professionnels, l'usage du téléphone est interdit. Il est donc impératif
de respecter strictement les consignes de sécurité propres à
chacune de ces situations et d’éteindre votre téléphone lorsque cela
est requis.
Par ailleurs pour éviter les risques d’interférences, les personnes
porteuses d’implants électroniques (stimulateurs cardiaques,
pompes à insuline, neurostimulateurs.) doivent conserver une
distance de 15 cm entre le mobile et l’implant et ne l’utiliser que du
côté opposé au côté où celui-ci est situé.
Waste disposal Please recycle appropriately. For appropriate
recycling and disposal instructions please visit: www.palm.com/
environment.
Précautions d'usage de votre téléphone mobile
Le taux de DAS(1) (Débit d’Absorption Spécifique) de votre Treo 700P
smartphone est 0,896 w/kg
240
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
Téléphoner en conduisant, même avec des équipements qui ne sont
pas interdits par la réglementation, est dangereux car il augmente
potentiellement le risque d’accident provenant de la distraction créée
par la conversation elle même. Aussi, est-il recommandé de ne
jamais téléphoner en conduisant et de considérer que l’utilisation
d’un kit mains-libres n’est pas une solution.
(1) Valeur DAS la plus élevée pour ce modèle de téléphone et pour
une utilisation à l’oreille, communiquée par le constructeur. Le DAS,
exprimé en w/kg, quantifie le niveau d’exposition aux ondes
électromagnétiques et permet de vérifier la conformité des mobiles à
la réglementation française et européenne qui impose que celui-ci
soit inférieur à 2w/kg.
Specifications
Radio
Phone features
•
CDMA 800MHz (digital cellular), 1900MHz (PCS), and
1400MHz (GPS)
•
EVDO and 1xRTT
•
Speakerphone
•
Hands-free headset jack (2.5mm, 3 or 4-barrel connector)
•
Microphone mute option
•
TTY/TDD compatible
•
3-way calling
Processor
technology
Intel XScale® processor, 312MHz
Expansion
SD/MultiMediaCard/SDIO card slot
Battery
•
Rechargeable lithium ion
•
Removable for replacement
•
3.5 hours full charge time
Palm OS® version
Palm OS 5.4.9
Camera
•
Still image capture resolution (1280 x 1024), 1.3 megapixel
•
2x digital zoom
•
Video capture resolution (352 x 288)
•
Automatic light balance
SPECIFICATIONS
241
Size
5.08 in. x 2.28 in. x 0.89 in. (129mm x 58mm x 22.5mm) with
antenna
Weight
6.4 ounces (180 grams)
Connectivity
•
IR
•
Bluetooth® wireless technology (1.2 compliant)
•
Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)
•
65,536 colors (16-bit color)
•
User-adjustable brightness
•
Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator
•
Backlight for low lighting conditions
•
Phone (including Palm OS®
Favorites, Dial Pad)
Display
Keyboard
Included software
•
System
requirements
242
SPECIFICATIONS
Pics&Videos (includes
camera and camcorder)
•
Messaging (text)
•
Web browser (Internet)
•
Pocket Tunes™
•
Calendar
•
Contacts
•
Memos
•
Tasks
•
Voice Memo
•
Documents-To-Go®
•
Calculator Basic and
Advanced
•
World Clock
•
Palm® Desktop software and
HotSync® manager
•
Windows 2000 or XP with USB port
•
Mac OS 10.2 –10.3 with USB port
•
Later versions may also be supported
Operating and
storage
temperature range
•
32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
•
5% to 90% relative humidity (RH)
SPECIFICATIONS
243
244
SPECIFICATIONS
Index
SYMBOLS
! in Tasks list 144
NUMERICS
1xRTT (single carrier) radio
transmission technology
225
1XRTT connections 218
troubleshooting 216
1XRTT icon 97
1XRTT technology 69
1xRTT technology 69
24-hour clock 181
3G2 files 118, 121
3GP files 118
5-way navigator 5, 23, 24,
187
A
AC charger 8
accented characters 30, 31
Access Powered devices
164, 208, 223
accessing
Alert screen 155
alternate character list 31
alternate characters 29
application menus 26
applications 33, 47
calculator 156
Call Log 42
command buttons 25
Compose dialog box 88
corporate servers 194
Dial Pad 39, 46, 64
email 75–78, 78–87, 194
Favorites pages 41
files 149, 194
HotSync Manager 170
information 188
items on expansion cards
174
items on pick lists 27
Palm online support 223
Pocket Tunes 126
Quick Tour 223
secure websites 97, 219
web browser 32, 97, 98
web pages 97, 99, 217
World Clock 141
accessories 5, 172, 233
Account Setup command 77
accounts
See also email accounts
conference calls and 50
corporate mail servers and
194
forwarding calls and 51
getting support for 223
setting preferences for 84
voicemail and 44
Accounts command 84
Acrobat file formats 149
activating
items on screen 25
smartphone device 11
Active Call View screen 45,
47, 49
active calls. See phone calls
Add Bookmark command 99
Add Call button 46, 49
Add Contact command 48
Add Favorites dialog box 53
Add New Number prompt 48
Add Song button 127
Add to album command 120
adding
accessories 5, 172
additional security 191
attachments 79–80
Bluetooth devices 57–58,
107
bookmarks 99
business cards 132
INDEX
245
caller ID photos 62, 131
captions to photos 114,
120
categories for applications
183
cities to World Clock 142
contacts 131
email addresses 78
emoticons 88
events 134, 136
expansion cards 172
favorite buttons 52–54
hands-free devices 59
memos 150
multiple recipients 54, 88
partnerships 58, 106
passwords 189, 190
phone numbers 48
pictures to albums 120
playlists 127, 128
private entries 190
QuickText phrases 88, 89
signatures 87
tasks 142, 143
TTY/TDD devices 68
videos to albums 120
voice memos 151
wallpaper 121
Address Bar pick list 99
246
INDEX
addresses
adding multiple recipients
to 54, 88
assigning to favorite
buttons 54
highlighting email 25
sending email and 78
synchronizing 209
text messages and 88, 90
viewing website 104
web links and 97
adjusting screen brightness
180, 193
adjusting volume
alarm tones 140
music 126
phone calls 11, 62, 212
ringer 62
video clips 115
voice memos 152
Advanced Mode (calculator)
156, 157
Advanced Mode command
156
agenda lists 133
Agenda View 64, 133, 138
Alarm check box 135
alarm clock 142
Alarm Sound pick list 140,
146
alarm tones 140
alarms
See also alerts
adding to calendar 135,
140
adding to tasks 143, 146
recording sounds for 140
setting for clock 142
Album command 120
Album list 117, 119, 120
albums. See photo albums;
video albums
alert icon 70
Alert screen 44, 90, 135, 155
Alert Sound pick list 85
alert tones 61, 62, 85, 93
alerts
See also alarms
clearing 155
displaying 155
including message text in
92
receiving messages and
85
responding to 44, 90
aligning the screen 182
Alt key 30, 225
alternate characters 30, 31
alternate characters list 31
anniversaries 136
Answer button 43
answering phone calls 43, 46
antenna 7, 229
applets 97
application buttons 32
application categories 33
application list view 183
Application pick list 179
application preferences 183,
185
applications
See also specific built-in
applications
accessing 33
assigning to Quick Keys
54
associating with buttons
54, 184
beaming 165
categorizing 183
caution for 174, 197
changing screen fonts for
180
closing 32
copying 174
copying text to 103
customizing 182–183
deleting 14, 160, 220
disabling synchronization
for 166
downloading 102, 159
finding text in 155
getting help with 159
installing 157–159, 197,
226
managing 149
moving around in 21
opening 5, 32, 33, 47, 173
playing music and 127
running on expansion
cards 219
sending over Bluetooth
connections 162
setting default 185
switching 47
synchronization defaults
for 18
transferring 13, 14, 163,
165, 174
troubleshooting 197
viewing information about
161
viewing menus for 26
viewing tips for 223
Applications button 5, 33, 37
Applications View
defined 225
displaying applications in
183
opening applications and
32, 173
overview 33
appointments 134, 210
See also events
Archive folder 160
area conversions 157
arrow icons 23
ASF files 118
Attach Signature check box
87
attachments
adding 79–80
displaying 82
downloading 82
multiple files and 80
pictures as 79, 114
removing 79
storing large 220
supported formats for 149
video clips as 79, 115
voice memos as 152
attendee information 137
INDEX
247
audio 179
See also music; voice
memos
Audio Caption command 114
audio captions
adding 114, 120
background music and
119
playing 117
Audio icon 117
Auto answer pick list 59
Auto Lock Device box 189
Auto naming pick list 116
Auto Sync dialog box 84
auto sync failures 85
Auto-complete check box
105
Auto-hide Toolbar option 118
Auto-Keyguard pick list 186
automated voicemail
systems 44
automatic shut-off 193, 225
automating tasks 52
Auto-off After pick list 193
auto-off interval 225
AVI files 118
248
INDEX
B
Background check box 138
background music 119
backgrounds 64, 138
backing up information 14,
18, 201
backlight (keyboard) 29, 180,
193
backlight icon 180
Backspace key 28
Backup folder 160, 198
backup folders 207, 221
Basic Mode (calculator) 156
Basic Mode command 156
basics 223
battery
charging 8–9
displaying remaining
power on 71
disposing 203
installing 7
maximizing life of 10, 38,
193
replacing 10, 202
viewing status of 9
battery door release 6
battery icons 9, 70
Beam Business Card
command 133
Beam Category command
164
Beam command 164, 165
Beam From pick list 165
Beam Receive pick list 194
Beam Status dialog box 165,
166
beaming
battery life and 11
defined 225
overview 164–166
troubleshooting 164, 166
turning off 194
bell 155, 204
birthdays 136
blank screens 203
blank time slots 139
Blazer application
See also web browser
Blazer web browser 97, 219
See also web browser
blinking bell 155, 204
Bluetooth application
opening 57
sending from 162
setting up connections
with 107, 108, 169
visibility options in 163
Bluetooth devices
connecting to 57, 106–
109, 169
disabling or enabling 11,
59, 163
entering passkeys for 108,
109
incoming calls and 46
receiving information from
163
receiving phone calls and
58, 213
sending applications over
162
sending information over
162
setting up 57–58
synchronizing from 169,
170, 206
troubleshooting 214, 215
visibility options for 108
Bluetooth icon 57
Bluetooth icons (Phone) 70
BMP files 117
bonus software. See built-in
applications
Bookmark Page icon 101
bookmark pages 101
bookmarks 99–101, 164
customizing 101
Bookmarks View 100, 101
Bookmarks View icon 100
border glow (highlight) 24
brightness (screen) 11, 180,
193, 203
brightness duration
(backlight) 180, 193
Brightness slider 193
browsing files 173
browsing the web. See web
browsing
built-in applications 157, 160,
223
See also applications;
specific application
built-in camera. See camera
built-in security software 185
Business Card command
133
business cards 132, 164
buttons
See also favorite buttons
accessing command 25
changing defaults for 184
customizing 53, 184
disabling 47, 187
highlighted on screen 24
opening applications with
32
restoring factory defaults
for 184
speed-dialing with 41, 53
Buttons Preferences screen
184
C
cache 106, 220
calculator 30, 156
Calculator application 156–
157
Calculator icon 156
calculator modes 156
calendar
See also Calendar
application
customizing 138–139
deleting events from 138
displaying 133
scheduling events for 134,
136
selecting alarm tones for
140
viewing tasks on 138
INDEX
249
Calendar application
changing fonts for 180
changing views for 133
color-coding events 137
creating events 134, 136
displaying events 65
opening 32, 65
overview 133
setting alarms from 135
setting default view 138
setting display options in
138–139
synchronizing information
in 18
Calendar button 5, 32, 133
Calendar views 134
call lists. See Call Log screen
Call Log button 42
Call Log screen 42, 48
call waiting 49
Call Waiting dialog box 49
caller IDs 62, 63, 131
calls. See phone calls
camcorder 115, 116
camcorder buttons 115
Camcorder icon 114
Camcorder View 114, 116,
120
250
INDEX
camera 113, 116
troubleshooting 219
camera buttons (Camera
View) 114
Camera icon 113
camera lens 6
Camera View 113, 116, 120
Cancel button (Active Call) 46
Cancel Spkr button 46
cancelling menu selection 26
Caps Lock indicator 29
Caps Lock mode 29
captions. See audio captions
Card Info application 175,
176
Card Info button 175
card readers 125
carrying cases 204, 214
cascading style sheets 98,
105
categories
adding ringtones for 64
applications and 33, 183
beaming and 164, 166
color-coding in 137
contacts and 132
events and 137, 139
memos and 151
naming 183
receiving from Bluetooth
and 163
sending over Bluetooth
connections 162
tasks and 143, 145, 146
Category command 183
category marker 139
Category pick list 139, 183
CDs 125
Center button 5
certificates 97
Change Lock Code option
188
changing
bookmarks 100
button defaults 184
contact information 132
default applications 184
email accounts 83
events 137
favorite buttons 54
information 12
lock codes 188
owner information 191
passwords 190, 191
playlists 128
QuickText phrases 89
screen fonts 180
wallpaper 39
web page layouts 98
character entry 29, 31, 89
character limits
memos 150
text messages 88
character searches 155
charge indicator 5, 9
charger cable 8
charging
smartphone 8, 9, 10
smartphone battery 8–9
charging status 9
chat icon 91, 94
Chat page (Preferences) 92
Chat screen 91
chat sessions 91, 92
Chat view 91
Choose Songs button 126
Choose Songs command
127
city information 141, 142,
193
City pick list 141, 142
Clear Cache button 106
Clear Cookies button 106
clock 141, 181
See also World Clock
closing
application menus 26
applications 32
pick lists 27
color palette 116
color preferences 92, 116,
182
Color Theme Preferences
screen 182
color-coded category marker
139
color-coding events 137
colored backgrounds 25
command buttons 25
commands. See menu items
completed tasks 144, 146
completion dates 146
components (Treo
smartphone) 1
Compose dialog box 88
Compress Day View check
box 139
compressed files 158, 159
computers
connecting smartphone to
17
downloading applications
to 159
installing applications from
159
installing synchronization
software on 16
quarantined files on 13,
15, 197
synchronizing with 13, 19
transferring information to
18
transferring multimedia to
121
transferring music from
124, 125
Con button (calculator) 157
conduits 135, 209
Conf button 50
conference calls 49, 50, 51
Confirm message deletion
check box 92
conflicting applications 197
conflicting events 139
connecting
headsets 55–56
to Bluetooth devices 57,
106–109
to computers 17
to virtual private networks
194
to websites 97, 106
INDEX
251
connections
receiving information over
Bluetooth 163
restrictions for 47
sending information over
Bluetooth 162
setting up Bluetooth 169
troubleshooting 212, 216
TTY devices and 68
viewing status of 69, 216
constants 157
Contact Edit dialog box 131
contact names 40
contacts
See also Contacts
application
adding photos to 121
assigning caller IDs to 63,
64
creating 131
deleting 132
editing 132
entering phone numbers
for 48, 53
looking up 53
marking as private 132
scrolling through 24
searching for 40, 65, 132
synchronizing 131
252
INDEX
viewing details about 41
Contacts application
adding events to 136
changing fonts for 180
opening 131
synchronizing information
in 18
Contacts button 131
Contacts list 25, 132
contracts 1
conversion functions
(calculator) 156, 157
cookies 97, 105, 106
Copy button 120, 174
Copy command 103, 174
Copy Items dialog box 120
Copy items to pick list 120
Copy to command 119
Copy To pick list 174
copying
applications 174
multimedia files 121, 122
music files 124
phone numbers 39
photos 119
text 103
user folders 198
videos 119
copyrighted materials 119
corporate email accounts
194
corporate servers 18
country-specific preferences.
See language settings
coupling 212
coverage area 10, 62, 68,
211
Coverage in/out pick list 62
crashes 204
Create chats from messages
pick list 92
creating
albums 120
audio captions 114, 120
bookmarks 99
business cards 132
caller ID photos 62, 131
categories for applications
183
chat sessions 91, 92
cities for World Clock 142
contacts 131
email 97
email messages 78
events 134, 136
memos 150
partnerships 58, 106
passwords 189, 190
playlists 127, 128
private entries 190
QuickText phrases 88, 89
signatures 87
speed-dial buttons 53
tasks 142, 143
text messages 88–89
voice memos 151
wallpaper 121
current date and time 141
current events 65
Current Privacy pick list 190,
191
customer service (wireless
service provider) 223
customer support (Palm) 223
customizing
applications 182–183
bookmarks 101
buttons 53, 184
calendar 138–139
camera 116
chat sessions 92
email 84–87
Keyguard 186
messaging options 92
smartphone 134, 177
system date and time 192
system sounds 179–180
tasks 145
web browser 104–106
D
daily events 133
Daily Repeating Events
check box 139
daily schedules 133
data. See information
data service icons 216
data services 75, 97, 216
data transfer 69
databases 155
Date & Time Preferences
screen 192
date formats 181
date preferences 192
Date stamp pick list 116
dates
adding to photos 116
changing event 137
completed tasks and 144,
146
displaying 133, 141
selecting 134
setting due 143
setting system 192
sorting on 90
synchronizing 192
viewing due 144, 146
datestamps 116
Day display options 139
Day View 133, 139
daylight savings 141
Daylight Savings Time check
box 142
decimal display formats
(calculator) 157
decimal values 157, 181
decompression utilities 159
Default Alarm pick list 140
Default Apps Preferences
screen 185
default settings 184
Default View pick list 138
degrees 157
delays 189
Delete command 83, 121,
160
delete confirmation
messages 92
Delete Contact command
132
Delete events older than pick
list 138
Delete From pick list 160
Delete Memo command 151
Delete Old command 83
INDEX
253
Delete Task command 145
deleting
albums 120, 121
alerts 155
applications 14, 160, 220
attachments 79
bookmarks 101
contacts 132
cookies 106
device names 15
email 83, 220
events 138
favorite buttons 55
files 220
memos 151
messages 90, 92
music from playlists 128
passwords 190
photos 114, 120, 121
playlists 128
tasks 145
video clips 115, 120, 121
desktop software. See Palm
Desktop software;
software
Details button 25
Details command 120
Device Name field 57
254
INDEX
device names 15, 57, 164,
205, 225
Bluetooth devices and 57
devices
entering passkeys and 58
devices. See Bluetooth
devices; hands-free
devices; smartphone
Dial another call prompt 49
Dial button 42
Dial Extra Digits
Automatically option 54
Dial Number dialog box 42
Dial Pad 30, 39, 64
Dial Pad button 46
Dial Preferences screen 65
dialing 39–42, 47, 53, 65,
103
dialog boxes
accessing command
buttons on 26
defined 225
getting help with 223
highlighted buttons in 24
digital cameras 117
See also camera
dimming keyboard backlight
180, 193
Disable cookies check box
105
Disable JavaScript check box
105
disabling
Add New Number prompt
48
Bluetooth devices 11, 59
cookies 105
Keyguard 37, 186
onscreen buttons 47, 187
synchronization 166
system sounds 179
the touchscreen 186, 187
web page images 98, 105
discovery 163
Discovery icon 107
discovery results list 107
Discovery Results screen
162, 163
discussion groups 223
disk space (smartphone) 219
Display my name in chat
window as entry field 92
Display Options command
138
Display Options dialog box
138
displaying
alerts 155
alternate characters 31
application information
161
application menus 26
applications 183
attachments 82
bookmarks 100
connection status 69, 216
contacts information 41
current date and time 141
due dates 144, 146
email messages 80, 81
error messages 222
event categories 139
events 65, 133, 138, 139
favorite buttons 41
items in pick lists 27
on-device guide 223
overdue tasks 133
personal calendar 133
photos 116, 117, 121
private entries 191
Quick Tour 223
signal strength 69
slide shows 118
tasks 138, 144, 146
unread messages 71,
133, 138
video clips 116, 118, 121
video recording time 114
voicemail messages 69
web addresses 104
web pages 97, 99
DOC files 149
documentation 2, 23, 75,
223
Documents application 149–
150
Documents icon 150
Documents To Go icon 150
Documents To Go software
149
downloading
applications 102, 159
attachments 82
email messages 84
files 102, 158
ringtones 60
support information 223
Downloads bookmark 102
downward-pointing arrows
27
drafts 79, 89
Drafts button 79
drained battery icon 9
draining the battery 8, 9
Draw on Photo command
114
drawing tools 114
drivers 170
Due Date pick list 143
due dates 143, 146
dummy expansion card 172,
173
E
earpiece 5, 46
eBooks 14
echoes 212
Edit Bookmark List dialog box
101
Edit Bookmarks command
100, 101
Edit Favorites Button
command 54
Edit Favorites Pages
command 53, 55
Edit Playlist dialog box 127,
128
edit screens 26
editing. See changing
Effects pick list 116
INDEX
255
email
accessing 75–78, 78–87,
194
adding multiple addresses
to 54
adding signatures 87
attaching photos to 79,
114, 119
attaching ringtones 80
attaching videos to 79,
115, 119
attaching voice memos to
152
checking 71
creating 78, 97
customizing 84–87
defining favorite buttons
for 54
deleting 83, 220
dialing from 41
downloading 84
forwarding 81
removing attachments for
79
replying to 81
requirements for 1
resending 79
retrieving 71, 80
scrolling 81
256
INDEX
scrolling through 24
selecting default
application for 185
sending 79, 90, 97
setting alerts for 85
sort options for 83
storing attachments 220
troubleshooting 215
viewing attachments 82
viewing status of 82
viewing unread messages
for 71, 133, 138
email accounts
changing 83
setting email preferences
and 84
setting up 77, 87
email application 75
email applications 185, 218
email options 78, 83
emergency calls 66, 70, 187
emoticons 88
empty battery icon 9
empty time slots 139
emptying Trash folder 83
Enable background play
check box 127
encryption 66, 97
Eng(x) display format 157
engineering notation 157
entering
alternate characters 30, 31
decimal values 157, 181
device names 15, 57, 205
email addresses 78
events 134, 136
information 12, 191
lock codes 187, 188
numbers 29, 156
passkeys 57, 58, 108
passwords 45, 189, 190
phone numbers 39–42,
65, 187
tasks 142, 143
text 29, 150
URLs 104
web addresses 99
entries. See information
entry screens 24, 190
envelope icon 83
erasing information 204
error messages 222
errors 207, 213, 222
Escalate ring tone volume
check box 60
EVDO broadband technology
225
EVDO connections
troubleshooting 216
viewing status of 69
EVDO icon 97
EVDO services 69
event conflicts 139
Event Details dialog box 135,
136, 137
events
changing 137
color-coding 137
creating 134, 136
deleting 138
displaying 65, 133, 138,
139
scheduling repeating 136
setting alarms for 135,
140
synchronizing 133
troubleshooting 210–211
viewing categories of 139
viewing duration of 139
Evolution Data Optimized
(EVDO) technology 225
Excel spreadsheets 73, 80,
149
Exchange ActiveSync 87
Exchange Address Book 209
Exchange Servers 87
expansion card slot 7, 172,
173
expansion cards
accessing items on 174
adding 172
beaming from 165
caution for 14, 175
copying applications to
174, 175
copying music to 124
copying photos or videos
to 119
deleting applications on
160
displaying albums on 117
downloading to 102
formatting 175
inserting 172
installing applications on
159
managing files on 173
moving files to 14
opening applications on
173, 219
opening files on 150
renaming 175
sending attachments to
81, 82
storing information on 14,
153, 172
transferring applications
from 174
viewing information about
175
extensions (phone) 47, 53
Extra Digits button (Active
Call View) 47
Extra Digits option (Add
Favorites) 53
F
fade setting 138
Fast Mode (web browser)
98, 105
favorite buttons
adding 52–54
defined 226
deleting 55
dialing with 41
displaying 41
editing 54
organizing 55
specifying number of 65
transferring to smartphone
53
Favorites pages 41, 54, 65
INDEX
257
features (Treo smartphone)
5–7
feedback 212
fields 24, 27
file types
pictures 117
videos 118
files
accessing 149, 194
attaching to email 80
browsing 173
deleting 220
downloading 102, 158
moving to expansion cards
14
opening 150
saving 150
streaming 102
transferring 13, 220
Files application 173
financial calculator 156
financial functions 157
Find dialog box 155
Find More button 155
Find Text on Page command
104
finding
chat sessions 91
contacts 40, 65, 132
258
INDEX
specific characters 155
text 104, 155
web pages 99
firewalls 194
5-way navigator 5, 23, 24,
187
Fixed display format 157
Flash mode 51
flight mode 38
Float display format 157
folder pick list 83
folders 90, 205, 209
switching between email
83
Font command 98
Font size pick list 181
fonts 98, 180
forgetting passwords 189,
191
Format Card command 176
Formats Preferences screen
181
formatting
expansion cards 175
formatting expansion cards
175
forums 223
forwarding
email 81
forwarding phone calls 51
freeing disk space
(smartphone) 219
freeing memory 106, 160,
220
freezes 197, 200
From pick list 174
full charge (battery) 8
G
Game Volume pick list 179
getting started 2, 11, 223
GIF files 117
Glossary 225
GPS receivers 109
gradients 157
graphics. See images
grouping photos or videos
117
groupware 87
H
hands-free devices
adding 59
connecting to 57
entering passkeys for 58
finding compatible 56
passkeys and 58
receiving phone calls and
58, 59
RF emissions and 233
switching between 59
troubleshooting 214–215
Hands-free Preferences
screen 59
Hands-free Setup button 58
Hang Up All button 46
hanging up phone 46, 47, 49,
50
hard resets 189, 201
hardware 1
headphones 122
headset button 43, 56
headset jack 6
headsets
See also hands-free
devices
Bluetooth devices and 57,
107
connecting to smartphone
55–56
entering passkeys for 109
receiving calls and 43, 46,
47
restrictions for 56
hearing-impaired services 67
help 195, 221, 223
hexadecimal characters 157
Hide Records option 190
hiding
blank time slots 139
information in entry
screens 190
Pics&Videos toolbar 118
private entries 190
web browser toolbar 103
High Priority command 89
highlighted buttons 24
highlighting
applications 33
favorite buttons 41
items in pick lists 27
items on screen 24
menu items 26
phone numbers 42
text 25, 103
web links 25, 98
hints 189
History command 103
History list 103
Hold button 46, 49
holidays 136
home city 141
home page 104
home page icon 99, 104
HotSync Log 207
HotSync Manager 170, 226
HotSync Manager icon 170,
206
HotSync Setup button 169
HotSync technology 226
hypertext links. See web
links
I
icons 99, 183
Ignore button 43
Ignore with Text button 44
image file types 102, 117
images
disabling web page 98,
105
downloading 102
saving 102
selecting as wallpaper 64
transferring 14, 220
troubleshooting 218
importing phone numbers
144
Inbox 25, 80, 93
Inbox icons 82
Incoming dialog box 85
incoming messages 93, 94
incoming phone calls 43, 49,
60, 187
INDEX
259
incompatible applications 14,
197
Incompatible Apps directory
13
indicator light 5, 9
Info command 14, 161
Info screens 161
information
accessing 188
backing up 14, 18, 201
beaming 164
changing 12
entering 12, 29–30, 191
erasing all 204
hard resets and 189
losing 175, 189, 201
marking as private 190–
191
masking 186, 190
protecting 185, 188
receiving over Bluetooth
connections 163
sending over Bluetooth
connections 162
storing 14, 153, 172, 220
synchronizing 13, 16, 18,
166–172, 208
transferring 13, 19, 164
260
INDEX
updating 13, 18, 153
infrared port
beaming from 165
defined 226
location of 7
synchronizing with 170,
206
infrared transmission 226
inserting expansion cards
172
installer 158
installing
applications 157–159,
197, 226
bonus software 19, 158
Palm Desktop software
13, 159, 199
smartphone battery 7
synchronization software
13, 16
third-party applications
220
VPN clients 194
interference 213, 215
international characters. See
alternate characters
international clock. See
World Clock
international settings. See
language settings
Internet 38, 158
See also web browsing;
websites
Internet connections 98, 106
troubleshooting 216
interruptions 222
Into album pick list 120
invalid characters 89
IR port
beaming from 165
defined 226
location of 7
synchronizing with 170,
206
items in pick lists 27
items on screen
activating 25
highlighting 24
selecting 25
iTunes 123, 124, 126
J
Java applets 97
JavaScript elements 105
JPG files 117
K
keyboard
accessing alternate
characters on 29
dialing with 39
entering information from
29–30
illustrated 28
incremental searches
from 40
locking 186
restoring factory defaults
184
keyboard backlight 29, 180,
193
Keyguard 186
Keyguard Preferences
screen 186, 187
Known Caller pick list 61
L
Label color pick list 92
language selection screen 8,
16
language settings 181, 199,
202
laptops 170, 171
large attachments 220
length functions 157
liability ii
lightning bolt icons 9, 71
Li-Ion battery 226
See also battery
links 90
See also web links
list screens
See also pick lists
accessing command
buttons on 25
highlighting items in 25
selecting items on 24
list view (applications) 183
listening to
music 122, 126
voice captions 117
voice memos 152
Lithium Ion battery 226
See also battery
loading web pages 90, 105,
218
Local button 170
locating
chat sessions 91
contacts 40, 65, 132
specific characters 155
text 104, 155
web pages 99
Location icon 66, 70
Location On option 66
locations, disabling/enabling
transmission of 66
Lock & Turn Off option 190
lock codes 187, 188
Lock Device dialog box 189
lock icon 98, 119, 163, 164
locking
keyboard 186
phone 187–188
touch-sensitive features
187
Treo smartphone 188,
189
logging in to corporate
servers 194
logic functions 157
looking up contacts 53
Lookup button 53
loops 200
losing
information 175, 189, 201
passwords 189, 191
Lost Password option 191
low coverage areas 211
lowercase letters 29
INDEX
261
M
M4V files 118
Mac systems
installing applications from
159
installing synchronization
software on 16
installing to expansion
cards and 159
listening to music and 122
removing applications and
160
requirements for 13
sending email and 75, 84
synchronization defaults
for 18
synchronizing with 168,
171, 206, 207
transferring music from
122, 124, 126
uninstalling desktop
software and 207
upgrading and 15
user folders on 198
magnet 6
mail. See email
Mail Service pick list 77
Manage Playlists command
127, 128
262
INDEX
map (World Clock) 141
maps (web pages) 218
marking information as
private 190–191
marking private contacts 132
Mask Records option 190
masks 186, 190
mathematical constants 157
mathematical functions 157
maximizing battery life 10,
38, 193
media features 10
Media Player 123, 125
memory 105, 138, 219
freeing 160, 220
memory slots (calculator)
157
memos
See also notes
creating 150
deleting 151
recording 151
scrolling through 24
Memos application
changing fonts for 180
entering text in 150
opening 32, 150
overview 147
removing memos with
151
synchronizing information
in 18
Memos button 150
Memos list 25
Menu button 5
menu items 26
Menu key 26, 28
menu shortcuts 26
menus 26
Message command 43
message lists 91
Message Tone pick list 93
messages
adding multiple recipients
for 54
arranging in folders 90
chat sessions and 91
checking status of 69, 71
creating 88
defining favorite buttons
for 54
deleting 90, 92
dialing from 41
displaying status of 93
displaying unread 71, 133,
138
including in alerts 92
invalid characters in 89
receiving 89
retrieving 45, 69, 71
saving 89
scrolling through 24
selecting phone numbers
in 42
sending 43, 88, 94
setting colors for 92
setting preferences for
92–93
specifying priority settings
for 89
troubleshooting 216
Messages page
(Preferences) 92
messaging 73
See also text messages
Messaging application
See also text messages
changing fonts for 180
creating chat sessions
from 91
creating text messages
with 88
customizing 92
deleting messages in 91
opening 32
overview 88
sorting messages in 90
status indicators for 93
messaging applications 185
Messaging button 5, 32
Messaging Inbox 25
messaging preferences 92–
93
messaging services 1
messaging, troubleshooting
216
metric values 157
microphone 6, 47, 116
Microphone pick list 116
Microsoft Excel 73, 80
Microsoft Excel
spreadsheets 149
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync 87
Microsoft Exchange Servers
87, 131, 133
Microsoft Office Manager
See Documents
application
Microsoft Outlook. See
Outlook
Microsoft Windows. See
Windows systems
Microsoft Word documents
73, 80, 149
mirror 6
mobile networks 38, 212
monitoring phone status 68
Month display options 139
Month View 133, 139
Move to command 120
moving
bookmarks 101
favorite buttons 55
moving around on screen 21,
23
moving through web pages
98, 105
MP3 files 124
MP3 formats 122
MP4 files 118
MPEG-4 formats 121
MPG files 118
multi-connector pin 6
multimedia file types 118
multimedia files 117
MultiMediaCard cards 172
multiple recipients 54, 88
music
adjusting volume 126
answering phone calls and
43
changing playlists for 128
INDEX
263
creating playlists for 127,
128
downloading 102
listening to 122, 126
memory consumption and
220
pausing 126
playing 102, 126, 127
selecting 126
stopping 127
uploading 124
music file types 102
music files 122, 124, 220
music subscription services
123
mute button 47
N
names
sorting on 90
synchronizing and 205
naming
categories 183
device 15, 57, 205
messages for chat
sessions 92
photo albums 113
photo groups 116
playlists 127
264
INDEX
video albums 115
voice memos 151, 152
navigator buttons 5, 23, 24
See also 5-way navigator
networks 38, 212, 216
New Bookmark dialog box 99
New button 25
New Message dialog box 79
Next Song button 126
No Service message 11, 38,
68
Normal Mode (web browser)
98, 105
Note button 132
notes
See also memos
adding to contact
information 132
adding to events 138
adding to tasks 144
scrolling through 24
storing 150
notifications 44, 85
See also alerts
number formats 181
numbers
calculator display options
for 157
entering from keyboard
29, 156
O
offline synchronization 209
offline viewing (web) 100
OK button 25
online forums 223
online support 223
opening
Alert screen 155
application menus 26
applications 5, 32, 33, 47,
173
Bookmarks View 100
Call Log 42
Dial Pad 39, 46, 64
email applications 218
files 150
History list 103
HotSync Manager 170
Pocket Tunes 126
Quick Tour 223
web browser 32, 97, 98
web pages 90, 105, 218
World Clock 141
operating system
(smartphone) 13
operating systems (PCs) 13
Optimized Mode (web
browser) 97, 98
Option key 28, 29, 32, 226
Option key indicator 29
Option Lock indicator 30
Option Lock mode 30, 88
options in pick lists 27
organizer features 10
Outbox 93
Outbox button 79
outgoing messages 94
outgoing phone calls 49
Outlook
duplicate entries in 209
entering information with
12
multiple appointments and
134
multiple contacts and 131
synchronizing with 17, 18,
166, 209
time zones and 135
Outlook folders 209
overdue tasks 133, 138, 144
owner information 191
Owner Preferences screen
191, 192
P
page icon 94
Page View 100, 103, 104
paired relationship. See
partnerships
Palm Desktop software
defined 226
device names in 225
entering information with
12
forgetting passwords and
191
installing 13, 159, 199
multiple appointments and
134
multiple contacts and 131
reinstalling 209
synchronizing with 18,
206
time zones and 134
troubleshooting 199, 206
upgrades and 15
PALM folder 113, 114
Palm online support 223
Palm OS software 13
Palm OS-compatible
applications 158
Palm Software Installation
CD 2, 16
paper clip icon 79, 82
paragraphs, selecting 25
partial battery icon 9
partnerships 58, 106, 227
passkeys 57, 58, 108
Password box 189, 191
password hints 189
passwords
caution for 190
changing 190, 191
deleting 190
dialing 47, 53
email and 77, 78
entering 45
forgetting 189, 191
owner information and
191
private entries and 186,
190
smartphone and 189
Paste command 39, 103
pasting
phone numbers 39
text 103
Pause button 126
pausing
music 126
streamed content 103
video playback 116, 118
INDEX
265
video recording 116
voice memos 151, 152
PCs. See personal
computers
PDB (Palm OS) databases
158
PDF files 80, 149
pending alerts 90
pending messages 91, 94
personal computers
connecting smartphone to
17
downloading applications
to 159
installing applications from
159
installing synchronization
software on 16
quarantined files on 13,
15, 197
synchronizing with 13, 19
transferring information to
18
transferring multimedia to
121
transferring music from
124, 125
266
INDEX
personal information 129,
185, 188, 191
See also information
personal information
managers 199, 227
personal schedules 133
personalizing smartphone
134, 177
See also preferences
phone
See also phone calls
answering 43, 46
conference calls and 50,
51
dialing 39–42, 47, 53, 103
dialing preferences for 65
documentation
conventions for 37
getting started with 11
hands-free devices and
55, 58, 59
hanging up 46, 47, 49, 50
locking 187–188
maximizing battery life and
38
privacy settings for 66
selecting alert tones for
61, 62
selecting ringtones for 60,
61
service carrier for 1
silencing ringer for 44, 179
troubleshooting 211–214
turning on and off 37, 38
viewing Call Log for 42
viewing status of 68
Phone application
accessing Dial Pad in 39,
46, 64
adding caller IDs 62, 63
customizing 64
dialing from 42, 53
displaying events in 134
enabling privacy settings
from 66
finding contacts from 40
opening 32, 38
overview 35
roaming settings 67
selecting wallpaper for 64,
121
setting alert tones 61
setting ringtones 60
setting TTY/TDD
connections 68
status icons for 68–71
Phone button 5, 32
Phone Call screen 43
phone calls
See also phone; phone
numbers
adding a second 48
adjusting volume for 11,
62, 212
automatically answering
60
disabling screen for 187
ending 46, 47, 49, 50
forwarding 51
keyboard backlight and 29
making 39, 46, 48, 51
placing on hold 46, 49
receiving 43, 49
restrictions for 47
running applications and
47
sending to voicemail 43
switching between active
50, 51
text messages and 90
transmitting location
during 66
viewing details about 45
viewing status of 49
phone indicator. See indicator
light
Phone Info command 12
Phone Info screen 12
Phone Lock 187, 188
Phone Lock command 187
phone numbers
adding 48
assigning prefix to 65
assigning to Quick Keys
53
copying 39
creating speed-dial
buttons for 53
dialing extra digits with 47,
53
entering 39–42, 65, 187
getting device 12
highlighting 25
importing 144
pasting into Dial Pad 39
redialing most recent 42
saving 48
selecting 42
Phone Off message 11, 38,
68
phone on icon 69
Phone Preferences
command 66
Phone Preferences screen
66, 68
photo albums 113, 117, 120
Photo Settings screen 116
photos
See also pictures
adding as wallpaper 121
adding caller ID 62, 131
adding captions to 114
adding to albums 120
adding to contacts 121
backing up 121
copying 119
deleting 114, 121
displaying information
about 120
downloading 102
grouping 117
personalizing 114
positioning on screen 117
removing from albums
120, 121
rotating 121
saving 114
scrolling through 24
selecting as backgrounds
138
sending 79, 114, 119
setting default size 116
setting preferences for
116
INDEX
267
storing 111
taking 113, 219
viewing 116, 117, 121
pick lists 24, 27
Pics&Videos application
copying pictures and
videos in 119
creating wallpaper with
121
hiding toolbar in 118
opening 117
organizing media with 120
removing photos or videos
from 121
rotating photos in 121
sending pictures or videos
from 119
synchronizing information
in 18
viewing pictures in 117
viewing slide shows in
118
viewing videos in 118
Pics&Videos icon 117
picture formats 117
Picture list 119
pictures 63, 113, 219
See also images; photos
PIM applications 227
268
INDEX
PIMs 199
plain text formats 81
Play button (Pocket Tunes)
126
Play icon (web browser) 102
playback
pausing 103, 116, 118,
126
resuming 103, 127
stopping 127, 152
playing
music 102, 126, 127
streamed content 102
video clips 115, 118
voice captions 117
voice memos 152
playlists 127–128
Playlists command 127
plug-ins 97
Pocket Tunes application
changing playlists in 128
creating playlists in 127
opening 125
overview 123, 124
playing music from 126,
127
upgrading 123
POP protocols 86
ports 17
Power Preferences screen
11, 193
Power/End button 5, 37, 38
PowerPoint files 80, 149
PPT files 149
PRC (Palm OS) applications
158
precautions 239
predefined passkeys 58,
108, 109
preferences
alarm tones 140
alert tones 61
applications 183, 185
buttons 184
calculator 157
camcorder 116
camera 116
country-specific 181
dialing 65
email 84, 85–87
hands-free devices 59
Keyguard 186
messaging 92–93
owner information 191
power settings 193
ringtones 60, 61
system colors 182
system date and time 192
system sounds 179
tasks 145
web pages 104–106
prefixes (phone numbers) 65
Prefs icon 191
preinstalled applications 157,
160, 223
See also applications;
specific application
presentation modules 172
presentations 149
preset delays 189
preset passkeys 58, 108,
109
pressing keyboard keys 29
pressing onscreen buttons
187
Previous Song button 126
primary applications 32
primary button assignments
184
prioritizing tasks 143, 146
priority levels 143, 146
priority settings 89
privacy flag 144
Privacy Mode check box 92
privacy settings 66
private entries 186, 190–191
programs. See applications
progress indicator bar (video
recording) 116
Prompt sounds pick list 116
protecting personal
information 185, 188
protecting the screen 5, 204
protecting Treo smartphone
185–192
Protocol pick list 77
proxy servers 106
pTunes icon 125
punctuation marks 29, 31
Purge command 90, 138
Purge pick list 91
purging old information 14
Q
quarantined files 13, 15, 197
quick buttons 32, 184
Quick Install 226
Quick Keys 53, 54
Quick Tour documentation
223
QuickText button 88
QuickText phrases 88, 89
R
radians 157
radio frequency emissions
230
random number generator
157
range (Bluetooth devices)
162
Rcl button (calculator) 157
readjusting the screen 182
receiving phone calls 43, 49
recently viewed web page
icon 99
rechargeable battery 1
See also battery
rechargeable battery. See
battery
Record command 164
Record Completion Date
check box 146
recorder 151
recording
ringtones 61
sounds 140
videos 114
voice memos 151
Records button 161
recovering lost passwords
191
INDEX
269
recurring events. See
repeating events
red paper clip icon 79
Redial List screen 42
redialing most recent number
42
redirector (websites) 217
reducing storage space 14
Refresh command 217
Refresh icon (web pages) 98
refreshing web pages 98,
217
Regulatory Information 229
reinstalling Palm Desktop
software 209
reinstalling third-party
applications 197, 198, 201
Reminder Sound pick list 140
reminders 135, 142
Remove from album
command 120
removing
albums 120, 121
alerts 155
applications 14, 160, 220
attachments 79
bookmarks 101
contacts 132
cookies 106
270
INDEX
device names 15
email 83, 220
events 138
expansion cards 172
favorite buttons 55
files 220
memos 151
messages 90, 92
music from playlists 128
passwords 190
photos 114, 120, 121
playlists 128
tasks 145
video clips 115, 120, 121
Rename Card command 175
Rename Memo command
152
renaming expansion cards
175
repeat intervals (events) 136
Repeat pick list 136, 140,
143
repeating alarms 140
repeating event icon 137
repeating events 136, 139
repeating tasks 143
replacing smartphone battery
10, 202
rescheduling events 137
reset button 201
resets 197, 199–202, 213,
222
caution for 189
resizing text 98
Resolution pick list 116
resolution settings (camera)
113
restoring factory defaults 184
restricting location
information 66
resuming playback 103, 127
Return key 28
Review photos/videos pick
list 116
RF emissions 230
ringer
adjusting volume 62
silencing 44
turning off 179
Ringer switch 7, 38, 44, 179
ringtone file types 102
Ringtone pick list 63
ringtone preferences 60, 61
ringtones
assigning to caller IDs 63,
132
downloading 60, 102
recording 61
sending with messages
80
setting for phone 61
setting phone 60, 61
roaming icon 69
Roaming message 68
Roaming pick list 61
Rotate command 121
rotating photos 121
S
safety 229
Save As command 150
Save as Contact command
121
Save as Wallpaper command
121
Save List button 127
Save Page command 100
saved web page indicator
100
saving
files 150
images 102
messages 89
phone numbers 48
photos 114
playlists 127
video clips 115
voice memos 151
web pages 100
schedules 133
scheduling events 134, 136
Sci(x) display format 157
scientific calculator 156
scientific notation 157
screen
accessing command
buttons on 25
activating items on 25
adjusting brightness 180,
193
aligning 182
automatically turning off
37, 193
battery life and 11
disabling 47, 186, 187
locking 187
moving around on 21, 23
protecting 5, 204
scrolling through 24
selecting items on 25, 27
troubleshooting 203–204
turning on or off 37, 193,
213
waking up 37, 46
screen fonts 180
screen protectors 204
scroll arrows 81
scroll bars 24
scrolling 24, 98
scrolling preferences 105
SD cards 172, 241
SD_Audio folder 125
SDIO (Secure Digital input/
output) cards 172, 241
search results 155
searching for
contacts 40, 65, 132
specific characters 155
text 104, 155
secondary applications 32
secure connections 106
secure web pages 98
secure websites 97, 219
security 58, 191
Security button 189, 190
security certificates 97
Security dialog box 189
security software 185
Select Font dialog box 180
Select Media screen 79
selecting
alarm tones 140
applications 33, 173, 174
chat sessions 91
dates 134
INDEX
271
favorite buttons 41
home city 141
items in pick lists 27
items on screen 25
menu items 26
music 126
phone numbers 42
photo albums 117, 119
playlists 127
songs 126
text 25, 105
time zones 134
video albums 118, 119
wallpaper 64, 121
web links 98
self-portrait mirror 6
Send button 5, 42, 79
Send command 162
Send From pick list 162
Send To Device droplet 125
sending
applications over
Bluetooth 162
calls to voicemail 43
email 79, 90, 97
information over Bluetooth
162
messages 43, 88, 94
photos 79, 114, 119
272
INDEX
to chat rooms 91
video clips 115, 119
voice memos 152
Sent folder 93
servers 18, 194
service contracts 1
service providers 69, 75, 76
See also wireless service
provider
setting
alarm clocks 142
passwords 45, 189, 190
setting up smartphone 2, 8
settings (incompatible) 197
Setup Devices button 107,
169
Setup Devices dialog box 57,
169
Shift/Find indicator 29
Shift/Find key 29, 155
Short Messaging Service
(SMS) 227
shortcuts 26, 33
Show Address Bar check box
104
Show Calendar event check
box 65, 134
Show Categories check box
146
Show Category Column
check box 139
Show Category List check
box 139
Show Completed Items
check box 146
Show Due Dates check box
143, 146
Show Due Tasks check box
138
Show Favorite buttons check
box 65
Show Messages check box
138
Show Priorities check box
146
Show Time Bars check box
139
Show timestamps in chats
check box 92
Show Wallpaper option 64
Shutter sounds pick list 116
Side button 5, 126, 151, 184
Signal faded pick list 62
signal strength 62, 69, 211,
212, 213
signal strength indicator 38
signal-strength icon 38
signatures 87
silencing system sounds 44,
179
silencing the ringer 44
silent alarm 60, 62, 140
silent alerts 93
single carrier (1xRTT) radio
transmission technology
225
SIT files 158, 159
Size button 14, 161
slide show options 119
slide shows 118
slider 24
Slideshow Setting command
119
smartphone
activating 11
adding additional security
for 191
battery life for 10
charging 8, 9, 10
components of 1
connecting Bluetooth
devices to 106, 107,
108
connecting to PCs 17
customizing 134, 177
documentation
conventions for 37
entering passkeys for 58
features illustrated 5–7
freeing memory for 160,
220
freeing space for 219
getting help with 195, 223
getting phone number for
12
hands-free devices
compatible with 56
headsets compatible with
55
locking 188, 189
naming 15, 57, 205
navigating around on 21
overview 1
preset bookmarks on 101
preset buttons on 52
protecting 185–192
required items for 2
resetting 189, 199–202
setting up 8
specifications for 241
storing 5, 6
synchronization defaults
for 18
synchronizing 13, 15
third-party applications and
220
transferring data to 14, 18
troubleshooting 195, 213,
223
turning on and off 8
unauthorized users and
185
updating information on
13, 18
viewing signal strength for
69
SMS messaging services
216, 227
See also text messages
soft resets 166, 199
software
See also Palm Desktop
software
accessing from web
browser 102
included with smartphone
2
installing 19, 158
managing 149
reinstalling 209
synchronization defaults
for 18
synchronizing information
and 16
troubleshooting 199
INDEX
273
uninstalling 207
updating 197
software conflicts 207
songlists. See playlists
songs. See music
Sort by check box 146
Sort by Date command 90
Sort by Name command 90
Sort command 90
sorting
messages 83
sorting messages 90
sorting tasks 146
Sound & Alerts Preferences
screen 140, 179
Sound Off position (ringer)
44, 179
Sound On position (ringer)
179
sound preferences 140
sounds 140, 179
Sounds button 179
Space key 28
speaker 6
speakerphone 46, 47
troubleshooting 212
special characters 29, 31, 89
specifications 241
speech-impaired services 67
274
INDEX
speed-dialing buttons 41, 53
Spkr-phone button 46
spreadsheets 73, 80, 149
Start With pick list 100
static 213, 215
statistical functions 157
statistical information 161
status icons (email) 82
status icons (phone) 68–71
stereo adapters 56, 122
stereo headphones 122
Sto button (calculator) 157
stopping
music playback 127
video recording 115
voice memo playback 152
storage solutions 153
storage space 14
storing
information 14, 153, 172,
220
music files 125
notes 150
photos 111, 113
smartphone 5, 6
videos 111, 114
streaming files 102
style sheets 98, 105
stylus 7, 23, 24, 27
submitting web forms 98
support (Palm) 223
support (wireless service
provider) 223
symbols 29, 31, 89
Sync automatically check box
84
sync button 17, 19, 125
sync cable 9, 12, 17
sync. See synchronization;
synchronizing
synchronization
ActiveSync and 87
Bluetooth devices and 106
device names and 15
overview 153
preparing for 13
recommendations for 18
removing applications and
160
selecting applications for
166–168
setting default application
for 184
troubleshooting 204–211
upgrading and 15
synchronization applications
(third-party) 201, 205, 208
synchronization software 13,
16, 199
synchronizing
Calendar events 133
contacts 131
dates and time 192
information 13, 16, 18,
166–172, 208
photos and videos 121
time zones 192
with Bluetooth devices
169, 170
with Microsoft Outlook
166
system colors 182
system dates and time 141,
192
system errors 207, 213, 222
system requirements (PCs)
13
system resets 197, 200,
213, 222
system sounds 44, 179–180
System Volume pick list 179
T
taking pictures 113, 219
Tap and Drag check box 105
tapping 23, 24, 25, 27, 204
Task Details dialog box 143
tasks
See also events; Tasks
application
adding 142, 143
assigning to attachments
81, 82
checking off 144
deleting 145
displaying 133, 138, 144,
146
marking as private 144
prioritizing 143, 146
setting alarms for 143,
146
setting preferences for
145
viewing due dates for 144,
146
Tasks application
changing fonts for 180
opening 142
synchronizing information
in 18
Tasks button 142
Tasks list 25, 133, 144, 145
Tasks Preferences screen
145
TDD devices 67
technical support (Palm) 223
technical support (wireless
service provider) 223
telecommunications devices
67
telephone calls. See phone;
phone calls
temperature conversions
157
text
copying 103
entering 29, 150
finding 104, 155
highlighting 25, 103
resizing 98
selecting 25, 105
viewing against photos
138
text fields 24, 27
text message icon 94
text messages
See also messages
addressing 88
checking status of 70, 71
containing links 90
creating 88–89
deleting 90
dialing from 41
retrieving 71, 89
INDEX
275
selecting alert tones for 93
sending 44, 88, 89, 91
setting priority of 89
special characters and 89
troubleshooting 216
text messaging service 1
text messaging services 216
Text Telephone devices 67
third-party applications
caution for 184, 197
compatibility with 13
deleting 14, 220
getting help with 159
installing 197, 220
reinstalling 197, 198, 201
searching in 155
transferring to expansion
cards 14
troubleshooting 23, 200,
220–221
third-party utilities 14, 191
third-party VPN client
software 194
three-way calling 49, 50, 51
Thumbnail View 117, 119,
121
TIF files 117
276
INDEX
time
displaying video recording
114
scheduling events and
134, 137
setting system 192
synchronizing 192
viewing 141
time bars 139
time formats 181
time preferences 192
time slots (calendar) 139
Time Zone pick list 134
time zones 135, 192, 210
Timed Events check box 139
timestamps 92
tips 223
Tips command 223
Tips icon 223
to do items. See tasks
toolbars 103, 118
touchscreen. See screen
Touchscreen Preferences
screen 182
transmitting location 66
Trash folder 83
travel alarm 142
Treo 700p smartphone. See
smartphone
trigonometric functions 157
troubleshooting 195, 223
Trusted Device list 107, 108,
163
trusted devices 106
See also partnerships
Trusted Devices button 107
Trusted Pairs. See
partnerships
TTY devices 67
TTY icon 68
TTY/TDD Mode icon 70
TTY/TDD pick list 68
turning on or off
Caps Lock 29
keyboard backlight 29
Keyguard 37, 186
microphone 116
phone 37, 38
screen 37, 193, 213
smartphone 8
speakerphone 46
Typing starts contacts search
option 65
U
unauthorized users 185
Unfiled category 163, 166
uninstalling
applications 160
Palm desktop software
207
third-party applications
200
Unknown Caller pick list 61
unlocking
the keyboard 186
the phone 187, 188
Treo smartphone 189
unread messages 71, 93,
133, 138
untimed events 135, 136,
139
Untimed Events check box
139
updating
application software 197
information 13, 18, 153
system date and time 141
upgrades 13–15, 53, 207
troubleshooting 197–198
uploading
music files 124
uppercase letters 29
urgent messages 93
URLs 90, 104
See also web links
USB hub 17
USB ports 17
Use color for pick list 92
user discussion groups 223
user folders 198, 205, 227
User Guide 223
usernames 77
V
VersaMail
documentation for 75
VersaMail application
accessing email and 75,
215
adding attachments from
79–80
creating email messages
from 78
customizing 84–87
displaying attachments
with 82
Exchange ActiveSync
accounts and 87
overview 75
responding to messages
from 81
setting up accounts for 76,
77
sorting messages with 83
switching accounts from
83
Version button 161
version numbers 161
Vibrate pick list 60, 62, 140
vibrating alarm 60, 62, 140
video albums 115, 117, 120
video file types 102, 118
video recording screen 114
Video Settings screen 116
videos
adding to albums 120
adjusting volume for 115
attaching to email 79, 115
backing up 121
copying 119
deleting 115, 121
displaying information
about 120
downloading 102
grouping 117
jumping to specific
sections of 116
pausing 116, 118
playing 102, 115, 118
recording 114
removing from albums
120, 121
saving 115
INDEX
277
sending 115, 119
setting default size of 116
setting preferences for
116
storing 111
viewing 116, 118, 121
View By pick list 183
viewing
alerts 155
alternate characters 31
application information
161
application menus 26
applications 183
attachments 82
bookmarks 100
connection status 69, 216
contacts information 41
current date and time 141
due dates 144, 146
email messages 80, 81
error messages 222
event categories 139
events 65, 133, 138, 139
favorite buttons 41
items in pick lists 27
on-device guide 223
overdue tasks 133
personal calendar 133
278
INDEX
photos 116, 117, 121
private entries 191
Quick Tour 223
signal strength 69
slide shows 118
tasks 138, 144, 146
unread messages 71,
133, 138
video clips 116, 118, 121
video recording time 114
voicemail messages 69
web addresses 104
web pages 97, 99
virtual private networks
(VPNs) 194
Visibility pick list 108, 163
voice captions
adding 114, 120
background music and
119
playing 117
Voice Memo application 147,
151–152
Voice Memo list 152
voice memos 151, 152
voice quality 212
voicemail
checking 69
retrieving messages 45,
69
sending calls to 43
setting alert tones for 62
setting up 44
Voicemail Alert pick list 62
Voicemail button 44
Voicemail icon 44, 69
voicemail page icon 94
Voicemail screen 44
volume
alarm tones 140
alert tones 62
music 126
phone 11, 62, 212
ringer 62
ringtones 60
video clips 115
voice memos 152
Volume button 5, 11, 62
volume conversions
(calculator) 157
Volume pick list 60, 62
volume preferences 179
VPN client software 194
W
waking up screen 37, 46
wallpaper 39, 64, 121
warranty 2
web addresses 99, 104
See also URLs; web links
web browser
accessing email providers
and 75
auto-completion options
for 105
beaming from 164
bookmarking and 99, 101
customizing 104–106
deleting cookies for 106
dialing phone numbers
from 42, 103
hiding toolbar in 103
installing applications from
158
opening 32, 97, 98
overview 95, 97
restrictions for 97
selecting default views for
100
selecting home page for
104
streamed content and 103
troubleshooting 217
unsupported elements for
217
web browser application.
See Blazer web browser;
web browser
web browser icons 98
web browsing
See also web browser
from smartphone 38, 97
memory consumption and
220
requirements for 1
secure sites and 97, 98
selecting default
application for 185
troubleshooting 216–219
web browsing service 1
web forms 98
Web icon 98
web links
assigning to favorite
buttons 54
creating email from 97
highlighting 25
Palm online support 223
selecting 98
web pages
accessing 97, 99, 217
bookmarking 99–101
caching 106, 220
changing fonts for 98, 180
changing layouts for 98
copying text from 103
dialing from 41
disabling images for 98,
105
displaying 97, 99
finding text on 104
loading 105, 218
locating most recent 99
opening from text
messages 90
opening History list for
103
refreshing 98, 217
saving 100
scrolling 98, 105
selecting text on 103, 105
sending email from 97
setting initial view for 104
setting preferences for
104–106
viewing offline 100
web-based email 75
websites
See also web browsing
accessing 97, 99, 106,
219
displaying addresses for
104
INDEX
279
displaying recently visited
99
downloading files from
102
entering addresses for 99
opening Palm online
support 223
redirectors and 217
transactions and 219
Week View 133
weekly events 133
weight conversions 157
Wide Page Mode 98
Windows systems
installing applications from
159
installing to expansion
cards and 159
listening to music and 123
removing applications and
160
requirements for 13
sending email and 84
280
INDEX
synchronization defaults
for 18
synchronizing with 167,
171, 206, 207
transferring music from
123, 125
wireless accounts. See
accounts; wireless service
provider
wireless connections 95,
162
wireless devices. See
Bluetooth
devices hands-free
devices; smartphone
wireless features 10, 220
wireless service provider
customer service for 223
onscreen message 68
preset bookmarks and 101
preset buttons and 52
smartphone requirements
for 1
technical support for 223
troubleshooting Internet
connections and 217
voicemail services and 44
wizards 158
WMA formats 123
Word documents 73, 80,
149
word searches 155
words, selecting 25
World Clock 141–142
World Clock icon 141
world map 141
Wrap Search check box 104
X
XLS files 149
Y
Year View 134
Z
ZIP files 158, 159
zoom settings (camera) 113
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.1 Modify Date : 2006:08:18 12:40:06-07:00 Create Date : 2006:08:18 11:55:36Z Metadata Date : 2006:08:18 12:40:06-07:00 Format : application/pdf Title : Your Palm® Treo™ 700p Smartphone User Guide Creator : Palm, Inc. Description : Final, 081806 Document ID : uuid:37b5fc4b-d6f8-42dd-bc58-27490276239c Instance ID : uuid:43c7b861-ad9f-4183-9cbc-aa70e5e01d67 Page Count : 286 Page Layout : SinglePage Subject : Final, 081806 Author : PalmEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools